JP6540177B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 has a display means having a display unit,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
First mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in time series, and first mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image is set in time series An information storage unit that stores in advance the second mode determination information;
When the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed on the display unit, the display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determining information, and A simultaneous display control unit configured to determine a display mode of the second type image according to the information for determining the second mode ;
The simultaneous display control means
When the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, start information is set in the start information storage means, and the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information Means for deleting the start information from the start information storage means when completing the process;
A unit that causes the display of the second type image according to the second mode determination information when the start information is set in the start information storage unit;
Characterized in that it comprises a.

  According to the present invention, display control can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for a big hit occurrence lottery and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by sound light side MPU. (A) It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of a table for advance lottery, (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of a table for reach lottery, (c) It explains the composition of sound light side RAM FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a control pattern table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a symbol is rockingly displayed in a symbol display apparatus, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a symbol is decidedly displayed in a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining various parts tables. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation display time defined by (a1)-(a3), (b1)-(b3) parts table. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by sound source side MPU. (A)-(e2) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the production | presentation for game circulation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows an example of the change display mode of a symbol. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of work RAM. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st high speed periods. It is an explanatory view for explaining an execution object table for the first low speed period. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the value set to the 1st counter for adjustment and the 3rd counter for adjustment, and the kind of pattern, (b) The value set to the counter for 2nd adjustment, It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the kind of symbol. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st high speed periods. It is an explanatory view for explaining an execution object table for the first low speed period. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for normal fluctuation | variations performed by display CPU. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows the flow of loop display production. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of work RAM. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a character stopping table, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a character moving table, and (c) is an explanatory view for explaining a background table. It is a flow chart which shows arithmetic processing for a character loop performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for background loops performed by display CPU. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the group display effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining moving picture data for group display. (A1) to (a3) are time charts showing the relationship between the image update cycle and the cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) the same decoded image data is drawn in a frame area to be drawn It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the range to carry out is varied. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for group display effects performed by display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed by a moving image decoder, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for group displays performed by VDP. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the effective period display effect. It is a time chart which shows the comparative example of (a), (b) effective period display production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for band display, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for blink display. It is a time chart which shows a mode that effective period display production is performed using both the (a1), (b1), (a2), (b2) band display table and the blink display table. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the effective period display performed by display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of number display production. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition for performing number display production. It is a front view of the said inner frame which expands and shows the lower side area | region of an inner frame. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a count performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output setting process of the measurement command performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the measurement command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for measurement display performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a number display production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the increase display performed by display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining an image for a first character, (b) an explanatory view for explaining an effect image, and (c) an explanatory view for explaining an image for a second character . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state in which the range to be drawn in the frame area to be drawn is made different among the image data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for pseudo animations. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that pseudo-moving image production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the pseudo-moving image effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for round effects performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) It is an explanatory view for explaining another example of false animation production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state in which drawing data is created along with execution of drawing processing. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a time-correspondence production is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in a normal period, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in a preparation period, (c) in a special period It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of a symbol display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device when it becomes the start timing of time-correspondence production in the situation where the production for game circulation is executed. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a time-correspondence production is performed by the relation with the execution situation of the production for game circulation. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of sound light side ROM, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for time corresponding presentation. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC corresponding | compatible process performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the preparation period start performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process in the preparation period performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process in the special period performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of the display content of the symbol display apparatus in a preparation period. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process for the preparation period start performed by the sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process in the preparation period performed by the sound side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the concrete contents of (a) and (b) separate preservation production. (A)-(c) It is an explanatory view for explaining a comparative example of another preservation production. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that another preservation | save production | presentation is performed. (A)-(c) It is an explanatory view for explaining the concrete contents of another preservation production. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for another storage presentation performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows a process during the operation effective period performed by display CPU. It is a flow chart which shows processing under production corresponding to operation performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for another preservation | save display performed by VDP. It is a flow chart which shows drawing data creation processing for another preservation display performed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific display content of angle display production. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of a memory module. (A)-(i) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various moving image data groups. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that angle display production advances. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the angle display effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the moving image corresponding | compatible table corresponding to A angle, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for angle display production performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of normal moving image data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of special moving image data. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that special moving image use presentation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use presentation performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the special moving image use presentation performed by VDP.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. . The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 is pivotable forward with the left side as the pivoting base end and the right side as the pivoting tip side in front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be pivoted forward with the left side as a pivoting base end and the right side as a pivoting tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip end side in a front view.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function to lock the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  The game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

  The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide means Guide rails are configured as. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 are guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rails. The game ball emission mechanism performs a game ball emission operation by manually operating the emission operation device 28 provided in the front door frame 14.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operation opening 33, a second operation opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, etc. ing.

  Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when entering the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when entering the first operation port 33 occurs or when entering the second operation port 34, three winning balls are paid out. When the entry to the general winning opening 31 occurs, the payout of 10 winning balls is executed, and when the entry to the special electric winning device 32 occurs, the payout of 15 winning balls is To be executed.

  The number of winning balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be a first operating port. The number of balls may be greater than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and game balls which did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are implanted to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, entering the ball means that the gaming ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being ejected from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the gaming area PA after passing through the opening Also included is an aspect of continuing the flow of the game area PA without being discharged. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24 a clearly, the general winning port 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 The entry of the game ball to the is also expressed as a winning.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. The first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are both open upward. Further, both operation ports 33 and 34 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general-purpose utility product 34 a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the commercial power item 34a, the gaming ball can not win in the second operation port 34, and when the common electric symbol 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the second operating port 34.

  A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation opening 34 in the flow direction of the gaming ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the gaming ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning. Thereby, it is possible for the game ball that has won the through gate 35 to win the second operation port 34.

  Based on the winning on the through gate 35, the utility power supply 34a of the second operation port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, and a common drawing display of the drawing unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is an area where the gaming ball does not pass in the gaming area PA The variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electronic combination open winning, the result of the stop corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the common view display unit 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power transmission open state. In the general-purpose open state, the general-purpose utility item 34a is open in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the common view display part 38a is comprised by the segment display which a some segment light emission part is arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed in the common view display unit 38a, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which plural types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the common drawing unit 38, a common drawing suspension display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the common drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls winning through the through gate 35 is held at a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by lighting of the common drawing hold display unit 38b.

  A lottery is triggered by winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly indicated through display effects in the special display unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36.

  In detail, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display unit 37 a. The display area of the special view display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special view display unit 37a, the variation display of the pattern is performed by performing the big hit occurrence lottery with the winning on the first operation opening 33 or the winning on the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery is performed as a stop result after the change display of the pattern is performed. In addition, although the special view display part 37a is comprised by the segment display in which several segment light emission parts are arranged in a predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display , Or a display device such as a CRT or dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern displayed on the special view display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of colors May be displayed.

  In the special drawing unit 37, a special drawing reservation display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special drawing display unit 37a. The number of game balls played in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of holdings is displayed by turning on the special view holding display unit 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be

  In the symbol display device 41, when variation display of the symbol is performed on the special view display unit 37a based on the winning on the first operation opening 33 or the winning on the second operation opening 34, the variation display of the symbol is performed accordingly It will be. That is, when the variable display is performed in the special view display unit 37a, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game round where the result of the big hit occurrence lottery becomes the big hit result, the symbols of the predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the effective line preset in the symbol display device 41.

  The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 (a) to 3 (j) individually show the symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are display surfaces of the symbol display device 41. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (a)-FIG. 3 (j), the design which is 1 type of a pattern is nine kinds of main designs in which the number of "1"-"9" was each attached, and the picture pattern of shellfish shape It is constituted by the sub pattern which consists of. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers of "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower are set as a plurality of display areas. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols and the sub symbols are arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of the numbers and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower figure pattern row Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged in each, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, ten main symbols are arranged and are configured by twenty symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (b), the display surface P is such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine patterns of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be. Further, on the display surface P, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lower line L4, and a right upper line L5 are set. Then, the variation display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a combination of symbols with the same numeral attached to one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is finished, the big hit moving picture is displayed as the occurrence of a normal big hit result or 15R probability variation big hit result described later.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) corresponds to the "specific symbol" and with the even number (2, 4, 6, 8) The main symbol corresponds to "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot occurs, the combination of the same specific symbol or the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, when a big hit result usually occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Moreover, when it becomes an explicit 2R probability variation big hit result which will be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed. An explicit movie is displayed.

  In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Also, based on the winning on any of the operation openings 33, 34, the variable display is started by the special view display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above variable display is stopped. Is equivalent to one game play.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, if the jackpot is won in the jackpot generation lottery based on the prize for the first operation port 33 or the prize for the second operation port 34, it is possible that the prize for the special power prize device 32 is possible. Transition to the open / close execution mode. The special power winning device 32 has a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is disposed in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not be won, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can be won if the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which transition is made when a hit result is obtained. In the closed state, although it is not impossible to win, it may be in a state in which the winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 configured as described above. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that enables the player to view substantially the entire game area PA from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the game area PA may be made through the window panel 43 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 If it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output are provided. Moreover, below the window part 42, the upper side bulging part 46 and the lower side bulging part 47 which bulged to the front side are arranged in parallel up and down. An upper plate 46a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a similarly opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper tray 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15, and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 46a.

  In the area outside the lower plate 47a in the lower side bulging portion 47, an effect operating device 48 having an operating portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the operation device for effect 48 is manually operated by the player in order to set the effect content on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 or the like as the predetermined effect content.

  On the back side of the inner frame 13, a main control device, an audio light emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power / fire control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 which controls the main control of the game. Incidentally, in the main control unit 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control substrate 51 etc. is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening is provided. You may As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can not be separably joined, and the structure of a joint portion (crimping portion) which requires destruction of a predetermined portion in the case of separation, and the adhesive layer becomes an adhesion target A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of having been peeled off by sticking is pasted across the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between several case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 53, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Specifically, NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as random access is possible, the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power / emission control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and emission control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operation power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply / discharge control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, so that the MPU 52 executes processing for power failure. It is possible to

  Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors concerned, detection provided in a one-to-one manner with respect to the winning correspondence entry portion such as general winning opening 31, special power winning device 32, first operation opening 33, second operation opening 34 and through gate 35 A sensor is included, and in the MPU 52, winning determination (filling determination) to each ball entry portion is performed. Further, the MPU 52 executes a big hit occurrence lottery and a big hit result type lottery based on the winning on the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and executes a reach occurrence lottery of each game time and a determination lottery of fluctuation display time Do.

  Here, the structure for performing various lottery in MPU52 is demonstrated.

  The MPU 52 uses a variety of counter information to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the special view display unit 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the common view display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot occurrence lottery, and a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining a jackpot type such as a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a regular jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach occurrence lottery when symbol display device 41 deviates out, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of hit random number counter C1, special figure display portion 37a and symbol display device 41 And the fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in Furthermore, a common use electric power release counter C4 used in a lottery for determining whether or not the common good type commercial product 34a of the second operation port 34 is to be in the electric power open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to "0". The information corresponding to the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is a hold storage area 54b as acquired information storage means when winning in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs. Stored in

  The holding storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The reserve area RE includes a first reserve area RE1, a second reserve area RE2, a third reserve area RE3 and a fourth reserve area RE4, and the winning history to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 At the same time, each numerical value information of the per-random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  If winnings to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occur in a plurality of consecutive times in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 Each numerical value information is stored in chronological order in the order of the third reserve area RE3 and the fourth reserve area RE4. By providing four reserve areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, the game ball's winning history of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is reserved and stored up to four at maximum. . The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, five or more, or may be singular. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when the variable display of the special view display unit 37a is started, and at the start of one game cycle On the basis of the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a determination of success or failure is made.

  More specifically, for each counter, the per random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" each within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the per-random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random-number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the per-random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the per random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a success or failure table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the jackpot generation lottery means.

  Under the gaming state where the low probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state where the high-probability mode hit / fail table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is twenty. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to “0”. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural big hit results, (1) mode of opening and closing control of special electric winning a prize device 32 in opening and closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the jackpot occurrence lottery means after the opening and closing execution mode ends, (3) after the opening and closing execution mode ends A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode of the commercial electric utility 34 a of the second operation port 34.

  As an aspect of the open / close control of the special power winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings on the special power winning device 32 in the period from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 30 seconds elapse or the winning to the special winning opening It is continued until the number becomes 10 pieces. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the large winning opening Is continued until six are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 58 is controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. Be done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one big winning opening is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of opening and closing of the special winning opening in high frequency winning mode and low frequency winning mode, the open limit time for one opening, and the open limited number for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode Also, as long as the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the special power winning device 32 becomes high between the start of the open / close execution mode and the end, it is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a greater number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the low-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode, substantially no winning of the special power winning device 32 occurs. You should do it. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the gaming ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, one opening is The product of the firing cycle of the gaming balls and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. Also, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one big winning opening are not the above, it is substantially set by setting the latter to be shorter than the former in the low frequency winning mode. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the special power winning device 32 does not have a winning.

  As a support mode in the commercial electric utility 34a of the second operation opening 34, the general operation of the second operating opening 34 when compared in the situation where the firing of the gaming ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the gaming area PA. The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electronic article 34a being in an open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the open position winning state in the electric combination opening lottery using the common utility combination opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general-purpose object 34a is in the open state is selected more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times is set to one more Opening time is set long. In this case, when the open state is elected in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the general purpose utility product 34a occurs a plurality of times, it is from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set to be shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, the high frequency support mode has a shorter time than the low frequency support mode as a securing time that is minimally secured after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed and the next electric combination opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first operation port 33 is higher than that of the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operation port 33. There is a high probability that a winning on the mouth 34 will occur. And, when the winning a prize to the 2nd operation opening 34 occurs, because the payout of the game sphere of specified number is executed, in the high frequency support mode, the game while the player does not decrease the ball very much It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time than in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It is also possible to increase the probability of being in the electronic combination open state winning state in. In addition, secure time to be secured when the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed (e.g. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display to be executed are prepared, in the high frequency support mode, it is set so that a short securing time is easier to be selected or the average securing time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured upon the next electric combination opening lottery being performed after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed (i.e., shorter) Or one of the condition of any combination or any of the conditions of shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the probability of winning, in the common drawing display section 38a: May enhance the advantage of the frequent support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. Then, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, in the high-frequency support mode, the transition to the low-frequency support mode is made when the number of games has reached the end reference frequency (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

  In the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the big hit occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state winning and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the big hit occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode . The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state winning and shifts to the jackpot state by it. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result to shift the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state.

  Note that the normal gaming state refers to a state in which the jackpot generation lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode in relation to the above-described gaming states.

  In the distribution table, among the values of "0 to 29" jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" usually correspond to the jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result "15-29" correspond to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the aspect of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified by the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result being set as the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation big win results, the advantage for the player is the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode is the highest 15R probability variation jackpot result, opening and closing execution In the support mode, although it becomes the low frequency winning mode in the mode, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result becoming the high frequency support mode becomes the lowest. Thereby, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In addition, as a kind of probability variation big hit result, opening and closing execution mode becomes low frequency winning mode, furthermore, after the end of opening and closing execution mode, big hit occurrence lottery mode becomes high probability mode, while support mode is maintained in the mode until then The implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variation jackpot result is achieved.

  Furthermore, as one kind of out result in the jackpot occurrence lottery, while transitioning to the opening and closing execution mode of the low frequency prize mode, the special out result that transition of jackpot occurrence lottery mode and support mode does not occur after the end is included It is also good. In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variation big hit result and the special outlier result as described above are set, the open / close execution mode transitions to the low frequency win mode and the support mode remains in the previous mode. In contrast to being shared, the transition mode of the jackpot generation lottery mode is different, for example, when either an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or an exceptional result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to allow the player to predict which result it actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by “1” within a range of 0 to 238 and to return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect in the symbol display device 41. Expected effects are provided with the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and the special display of the stop display result after the variable display is performed in the game round when the open / close execution mode of the special power prize device 32 is high frequency prize mode In the gaming machine as a result, the player is made to think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result at a stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is started. It says the display state for.

  In the expectation effect, two types are set: the reach effect and the advance effect for expecting the occurrence of the reach effect or the special display result in the previous stage of the reach effect.

  In the reach effect, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is made to stop and display the symbols for some symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 A combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface P after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  About reach production Specifically, on the preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, the jackpot of the symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode as a front step of ending the fluctuation display of the symbol A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols with which a combination may be established, and variation display of symbols is performed by a final stop symbol row under a situation where the reach line is formed.

  If the display contents of FIG. 4 are specifically explained, first, in the state where the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row Z1 of the upper row and the variation display of symbols is finished in symbol row Z3 of the lower row further, any one is effective A reach line is formed by stopping display of the main symbols with the same number attached to the lines L1 to L5, and the variation display of symbols is performed in the middle row of the symbol row Z2 in a situation where the reach line is formed. It becomes reach production by being treated. Then, when the high frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol row Z2 in the middle row is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is ended.

  In advance notice, after variation display of symbols is started on display surface P of symbol display device 41, in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, the background image may be a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, or the pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be the predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice effects may occur in any of the game rounds when reach effect is performed and when reach effect is not performed, but the case where reach effect is performed is higher than the case where reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode. In addition, in game times which are not transferred to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to in response to the occurrence of reach effect with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Will be executed if On the other hand, the main control device 50 does not determine whether to perform the advance effect, but the sound emission control device 60 does.

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the fluctuation display time in the special view display unit 37 a and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the special view display unit 37a and the time of the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of the fluctuation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. Note that when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  For example, the common utility battery release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The routine power release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the power hold area 54c at the timing when the game ball is won in the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the general-purpose utility 34a is controlled to an open state by the value of the stored general-purpose utility open counter C4.

  The payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the power / emission control device 57 is connected. The payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the result of the winning determination on the winning combination ball entry unit. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 50. A release permission command is transmitted to the power and emission control device 57 based on the fact that the emission control device 28 is operated. Based on the release permission command received from the main control device 50, the power / emission control device 57 drives the game ball emission mechanism 58 to cause the game balls to be emitted toward the game area PA.

  A special view display unit 37a and a common view display unit 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the special view display unit 37a and the common view display unit 38a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, the display control of the special view display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52 at each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not the common utility product 34a is to be in the open state is specified, the display control of the common drawing display unit 38a is executed in the MPU 52.

  The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a special electric prize drive unit for opening and closing the open / close door of the special electric award winning device 32, and a general electric utility drive unit for opening and closing the ordinary electric utility 34a of the second operation port 34. . That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the special electric wire winning driving unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the common utility player 34a is won, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the common utility product drive unit so that the common utility product 34a is opened and closed. Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and transmits various commands for effect to the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, the process executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processes of the MPU 52 are roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in the present embodiment).

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, power on wait processing is performed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until the predetermined time for wait (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started, without progressing to the next process. The operation start and initialization of the symbol display device 41 are completed in the execution period of the power on wait process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / emission control device 57 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, the power failure flag of the RAM 54 is set to "1". Determine if In step S106, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum. In the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of stored data. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the start of business operation of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. In addition, when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set, or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to the process of step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, the process in step S108 is not performed under the condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Go to In step S109, power on setting processing is performed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 to recognize the current gaming state. Do.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of step S110 to step S113. That is, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates in accordance with the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of step S110 to step S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining process of the step S110 to the step S113 is a non-periodic process which is executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt disable setting is performed. In the following step S111, the random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the RAM 54, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state where the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state where it is permitted. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, 4 msec cycle). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power supply interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of the power failure is specified, the power failure processing is executed.

  In the subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the random number updating process for drawing, the update of the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general purpose battery release counter C4 is executed. Specifically, the present numerical value information was sequentially read out from the per random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the general electric utility release counter C4, and the process of adding one each of the read numerical information was executed. Later, the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is performed as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter updating process is performed as in step S112.

  In the subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process is performed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of plural types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to the flag for game suspension provided in the RAM 54.

  In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set to the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, processing in step S207 and subsequent steps is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to various driving units is executed. For example, the output of the drive signal to the special electric wire prize drive unit is started when the information to switch the electric special prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, and the information is to be changed when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stop output of drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the common use utility 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the common use commons drive unit is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In the following step S208, a reading process is performed. In the reading process, reading of signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In the subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the prize detection process, the signals received from the respective prize detection sensors are read, and the presence or absence of prizes in the general prize port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the through gate 35 Execute processing to identify

  In the subsequent step S210, a timer update process is performed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54. In this case, the timer counter is stored in which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated, but both the update of the subtraction type timer counter and the update of the addition type timer counter are collectively performed. It is good also as composition.

  In the following step S211, a launch control process is performed to control the launch of the gaming ball. In the situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, as described above, one gaming ball is launched in 0.6 sec which is a predetermined launch cycle.

  In the subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, confirmation of disconnection of each winning detection sensor and confirmation of opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208.

  In the following step S213, special figure special power control processing for executing execution control of the game times and execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. In the special figure special power control process, when the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 has a prize, the number of the suspension information stored in the suspension storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing each numerical value information of the per-random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point as the hold information in time series in the hold storage area 54b is executed. In addition, in the special figure special power control processing, big hit occurrence which decides whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big hit winning on condition that the game circulation is not in and it is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the hold information is stored. If it corresponds to the lottery process and the jackpot winning, the distribution determination process is executed to determine which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to. Further, in the special figure special power control process, in addition to the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process, if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence or not While performing the reach determination process which determines A, the process which selects the fluctuation display time of a game time using the numerical information of the fluctuation | variation type | mold counter CS in that time is performed. In this case, the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the presence of jackpot win, jackpot type and reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and the read fluctuation display time table and the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that timing Determine the variation display time of the game times. And while transmitting the command for change including the information of the change display time of the determined game times and the type command including the information of the game result to the voice light emission control device 60, the change of the pattern in the special view display portion 37a Start the display. As a result, one game cycle is started, and the special game display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 start producing effects for the game cycle. Further, the MPU 52 starts measurement of the fluctuation display time when the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted.

  Further, in the special figure special power control process, during the execution of one game time, when the variation display time corresponding to the game time has elapsed, the jackpot generation lottery process and distribution of the current game time in the special figure display unit 37a The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and the measurement of the definite display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special view display unit 37a is maintained over the fixed display time. If the final display time has elapsed, and if the current game play is out of response, the new game play is started on condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. Execute the process If no hold information is stored, the process waits until hold information is newly acquired.

  On the other hand, if the current game play corresponds to the jackpot result, processing for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 60. Further, in the special view special power control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. At the time of each processing, an open command indicating that a round game is to be started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command indicating that the round game is to be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. Also, in the special view special power control process, when ending the open / close execution mode, an ending command indicating that is sent to the voice emission control device 60, and a jackpot occurrence lottery mode or support mode after the open / close execution mode is set. Execute the process of In the opening / closing execution mode, for example, an opening period occurs over a period such as 3 seconds, and an effect is executed to make it possible for the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred in the opening period. After that, a round game in which the special power prize device 32 is opened and closed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after a predetermined number of round games have been executed, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect is executed to make it possible for the player to recognize that the open / close execution mode is ended in this ending period. .

  After the special figure special power control process of step S213 is executed in the timer interrupt process, the general view general power control process is executed in step S214. When the winning gate on the through gate 35 has been awarded, the routine control routine executes processing for acquiring the hold information on the general view side, and the hold information on the general view side is stored. Then, the release determination is performed on the hold information, and the release determination is used as a trigger to execute processing for producing effects for the common drawing. Also, based on the result of the open determination, processing is performed to open and close the general purpose utility product 34 a of the second operation port 34.

  In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the special view display portion 37a on the special view hold display portion 37b is performed. At the same time, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the common drawing display unit 38 a on the common drawing reservation display unit 38 b is performed. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of the previous step S213 and step S214, setting of output information for updating the display content of the special view display unit 37a is performed, and the display content of the common view display unit 38a is set. Set the output information for updating.

  In the subsequent step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting a winning ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is performed to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. Thereafter, this timer interrupt processing is ended.

<Speech emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the voice emission control device 60 includes a voice emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

  As the ROM 63, storage means (that is, non-volatile storage means) that can be accessed randomly at the time of reading the control program and fixed value data and that do not require external power supply for storage are used. Specifically, NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as random access is possible, the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary. Further, the configuration in which the control and operation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions are separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control unit 50 and the rendering operation control device 48 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72 described later of the display control device 70 is connected.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads out, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to the input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, but includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Be

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74 and the VRAM 75 via the bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on a command received from the audio light emission control device 60, performs a drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described below.

  The memory module 74 stores control data including control programs and fixed value data in advance, and also includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, moving image data, and the like. Various image data are stored in advance. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory which does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-write and read only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape and pattern of the character, and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which the still image data is compressed. Moving image data will be described in detail later.

  The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory which requires an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 73 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily performed. The VRAM 75 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 75 includes an expansion buffer 81. Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 76 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to one another via a bus, and also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  The VDP 76 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 in the register 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 activates a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. Note that all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the control program and the contents of the drawing list The controller 91 may be configured to execute a predetermined process based on the above. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the above process, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data of one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or processing) the image data read out to the expansion buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame means data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of the frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data of one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The present invention is not limited to the full color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b in the frame buffer 82, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

  In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 94. It is outputted to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 78. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 82 a and 82 b to be output to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by performing resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. Also, the moving picture decoder 93 decodes the moving picture data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 62 of Audio Emission Control Device 60>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 62 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side MPU 62) of the sound emission control device 60 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing repeatedly executed by the sound light side MPU 62 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  First, in step S301, the table setting process for setting the control table used to execute the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45, and the control of the display control device 70 is performed. Do. In the table setting process, for example, setting of a control pattern table for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 (hereinafter, referred to as the main MPU 52) of the main control apparatus 50 is performed. In the subsequent step S302, a command selection process is performed to instruct the display CPU 72 the content of display control of the symbol display device 41. In the command selection process, a command output to the display CPU 72 is performed according to the control table read in the table setting process of step S301.

  Thereafter, in step S303, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control table read in the table setting process of step S301. Further, in step S304, sound output control processing for performing sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control table read in the table setting process of step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer updating process, the pointer information of the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  When the variable command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a storage process of the game result is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the information on which is the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game run is specified, The specified information is written to the RAM 64.

  Thereafter, the advance lottery process is executed on the condition that the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received from the main side MPU 52 this time is the variable display time corresponding to the generation possible situation of the notice effect (step S403: YES). (Step S404). In the advance lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the advance notice effect is to be performed by the symbol display device 41 in the present game round. As the advance notice effect, as described above, after variation display of symbols is started on the symbol display device 41, in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable pattern row in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is displayed so far These include those having a different predetermined aspect and those having a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as a predetermined aspect different from the previous aspects. The advance notice may occur at any of the game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but the direction when the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, the notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results compared to the game times corresponding to the out results, further notice effect of the appearance rate is lower in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result Is set to be easy to occur.

  In the advance lottery process, the advance lottery table T1 stored in advance in the ROM 63 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side ROM 63) of the sound emission control device 60 is stored in the RAM 64 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side RAM 64) of the sound emission control device 60. read out. The preliminary drawing table T1 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variable command and the type command. Therefore, in the preliminary lottery process, the preliminary lottery table T1 corresponding to the fluctuation command and type command received from the main MPU 52 this time is read out from the sound side ROM 63.

  FIG. 11A is an explanatory view for explaining an example of the preliminary lottery table T1. On the notice lottery table T1, the notice lottery result and the numerical range of the notice lottery counter are associated. As the preliminary lottery result, a non-occurrence of no preliminary announcement, a first preliminary announcement in which the preliminary announcement is performed in the first mode, and a second preliminary announcement in which the preliminary announcement is performed in the second mode are set. . In the first notice effect, for example, the individual image for the first notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in the predetermined mode, and in the second notice effect, for example, the individual image for the second notice effect is in the predetermined mode It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate. The preliminary lottery counter is provided in the sound light side RAM 64. The notice lottery counter is a loop counter which can take any value from "0" to "239", and is periodically (eg, 4 msec) incremented by "1" to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Return. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the notice lottery table T1, possible values are assigned to any notice lottery result in the notice lottery counter.

  In addition, according to the kind of table T1 for advance notice lottery, the kind of advance notice object used as lottery object may differ. In this case, although there are cases where the types of notice effects to be drawn are the same among different types of notice lottery tables T1 but the selection rates of the notice effects are different, different types of notice lottery tables T1 may be used. In some cases, part or all of the types of preliminary effects to be drawn may be different.

  In the advance lottery process, the value at that time of the advance lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the table T1 for the advance lottery read out this time. Then, the notice lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the notice lottery counter is acquired as the result of the present notice lottery process.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S403, or if the process of step S404 is executed, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received from the main MPU 52 is reached. A reach effect lottery process is executed (step S406) on condition that it is a fluctuation display time corresponding to the occurrence of an effect (step S405: YES). That is, when the variation display time of the game times determined by the main side MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of reach effect, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined by the reach effect lottery process, and the main side MPU 52 When the variable display time of the game times determined in the step does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

  In the reach effect, as already described, by stopping and displaying the symbols for a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, it corresponds to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode A combination of reach symbols that may have a combination of the big hit symbols is displayed, and in that state, a display state in which the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows is included. Also, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effects by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, or Also, it is possible to perform reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface P after reducing or non-displaying a combination of reach symbols. The reach effect is more likely to occur in the game round corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game round corresponding to the gap result, and further the reach effect in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is lower in appearance rate It is set to be easy to occur.

  In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 63 is read out to the sound light side RAM 64. The reach drawing table T2 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Therefore, in the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 corresponding to the fluctuation command and type command received from the main side MPU 52 this time is read out from the sound side ROM 63.

  FIG. 11B is an explanatory view for explaining an example of the reach lottery table T2. The reach lottery result and the numerical range of the reach lottery counter are associated with each other for the reach lottery table T2. As the reach lottery result, the first reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the first mode, the second reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the second mode, and the third reach in which the reach effect is executed in the third mode The effect is set. In the first reach effect, for example, the individual image for the first reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in the predetermined mode, and in the second reach effect, for example, the individual image for the second reach effect is in the predetermined mode It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 to operate, and in the third reach effect, for example, an individual image for the third reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined mode. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound light side RAM 64. The reach lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from “0” to “239”, and is incremented by “1” periodically (for example, 4 msec) to “0” when the maximum value is reached. Return. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the reach lottery table T2, possible values for the reach lottery counter are allocated to any reach lottery result.

  In addition, according to the kind of table T2 for reach lottery, the kind of reach production used as lottery object may differ. In this case, although the types of reach effects to be drawn are the same among different types of reach drawing tables T2, there are cases where the selection rates of reach effects are different, but different types of reach drawing tables T2 may be selected. In some cases, some or all of the types of reach effects to be drawn may be different.

  In the reach effect lottery process, the value at that time of the reach lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the reach lottery table T2 read out this time. And the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as a result of the current reach effect lottery process.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative determination is made in step S405 or when the process of step S406 is executed, stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is either the big hit result or the 15R probability variation big hit result, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbol is established on one valid line L1 to L5 The determined information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can usually be selected in either the large jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result. In addition, the effective lines L1-L5 in which the combination of the same symbol is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the same combination of odd symbols may be selected even if it is usually a jackpot result.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is an explicit 2R probability variation big hit result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the valid lines L1 to L5, and one valid line L1. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination ("3.4.1") of a specific symbol combination is established on ~ L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game run is an out result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the combination of the variation command and the type command. And when reach production occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbol are not realized on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one or two on the effective lines L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the present stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not generated, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbol are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and reach on all the effective lines L1 to L5 The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the present stop result.

  Thereafter, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S408). In the setting process of the control pattern table, as a result of the notice lottery process (step S404), presence or absence of reach effect, if reach effect occurs, the result of reach effect lottery process (step S406), and stop symbol determination process ( The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read out from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

  The control pattern table T3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a view showing an example of a control pattern table T3 that can be set when the advance notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the game round where the 15R probability variation big hit results.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the control pattern table T3, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variation display time of the target game is set, and information of task contents is made to correspond to each pointer information. And information on presence / absence of command output are set.

  Information of task content is information set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game run, and light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 in a mode according to the task content information in each frame Control is performed and sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed. Specifically, in the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and data at the start of the notice effect start is set in the pointer information of "200". The data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and at the start of super reach in the pointer information of "700" The data of is set, the data at the start of the fixed effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and the data at the start of the standby display is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each piece of pointer information corresponds to a break timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In addition, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between division timings is set in pointer information other than these.

  The information on the presence or absence of the command output is information indicating the presence or absence of the output of the command from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By the command output to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the content of the image in the symbol display device 41 and the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 It becomes possible to associate the content with the sound output content in the speaker unit 45. That is, in accordance with the contents of the moving image in the symbol display device 41, the effect of light is executed by the display light emitting unit 44, and the effect of sound output is executed by the speaker unit 45. Specifically, in the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, command data is set to pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of variation is set in the content of the task. Therefore, at the start of variation of the game time, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. Moreover, in the contents of the task, each pointer information in which data at the time of start of the notice effect start, data at the start of normal reach, data at the start of super reach, data at the start of fixed effect start, and data at the start of standby display are set. Specifically, command data is set for each piece of pointer information of “200”, “400”, “700”, “1000”, and “1400”. Therefore, within the range of the effects of the game circulation started by the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger that the variable side command and the type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 52, of the effect classification included in the effect of the game circulation When the type changes, display control corresponding to the new effect classification is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

  In addition, the control pattern table T3 is a demonstration display effect in a situation where neither the effect for the open / close execution mode nor the effect for the game occurrence or the effect for the open / close execution mode is performed in addition to the effect for the game operation It is provided corresponding to. Since the control pattern table T3 is set corresponding to various situations as described above, some control pattern table T3 is read out to the sound light side RAM 64 when the operation power is supplied to the sound light side MPU 62. It is in a state of

  Thereafter, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S409). In the processing, the information of the fluctuation display time of the current game is identified from the contents of the fluctuation command currently received from the main MPU 52, and the information of the specified fluctuation display time is described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, it is set in the fluctuation time counter 64 a provided in the sound light side RAM 64. The fluctuation time counter 64a is a counter for specifying by the sound light side MPU 62 the timing of ending the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and starting the finalized display of the symbol in the present game round. The value set in the fluctuation time counter 64a is decremented by one each time the sound processing MPU 62 starts the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), that is, 4 msec has elapsed.

  The variation display mode of the symbol in the case where the effect for game circulation is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIG. 13 (a) and FIG. 13 (b). FIG. 13 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining how the symbol is displayed in a rocking manner in the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 13 (b) explains how the symbol is displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG.

  Reach production is achieved by utilizing the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without the game times (game times resulting in the result being out without reach effect being generated) or the normal reach display (the characters for the reach effect being displayed) In the game session where the display content to be performed is performed, the variable display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started in the high speed variable display which is the low identification mode, and thereafter each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is in a predetermined order At the same time as switching to the low speed fluctuation display which is the high discrimination mode, the standby display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the state in which the standby display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued for a predetermined period, each symbol displayed in the standby display is displayed as the final stop display and the finalized display state is the final display. Continued over time.

  In the standby display, as shown in FIG. 13A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, a standby region SA1 virtually set so as to be three each for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is a display state where a symbol is waiting at SA9. In a state in which only upper symbol row Z1 is on standby display and scroll display of symbols is continued in remaining symbol rows Z2 and Z3, one symbol is on standby for each of standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to upper symbol row Z1. It will be in the state of doing. Further, in the state where upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 become standby display and scroll display of symbols is continued in middle symbol row Z2, standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to upper symbol row Z1 and lower row symbol row Z3. In each of the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to the symbol, one symbol is waiting. Further, in a state where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on standby, one symbol is on standby in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are not displayed stationary, but are variably displayed within the range of the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. Specifically, each symbol which is the target of the standby display is a range including the stop position in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9 and swings vertically or horizontally in a range sandwiching the stop position. Move.

  In the finalized display, as shown in FIG. 13B, each one symbol displayed on standby in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponds to the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9. This is a display state in which the variation display in the range is ended, and the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop position of each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. By performing the confirmation display in this manner, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the stopping result of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 of the current game run.

  On the other hand, in the game run where super reach display is performed, the fluctuation display of the symbols is started, and the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 which are a part of symbol rows are each waiting areas SA1 to SA3 and SA7 to SA9 After being displayed on standby and the reach line is formed, an image for super reach is displayed. Thereafter, in a state in which the combination of the jackpot symbols or the combination of the outreach symbols is formed, the symbols are displayed on standby in each standby area on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for a predetermined period. Then, the symbols are determined and displayed, and the determined and displayed state is continued over the determined display time.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), it is a situation that execution control of the effect is being performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES). When the value of the fluctuation time counter 64a of the RAM 64 is “0” (step S411: YES), the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is displayed on the fixed time counter 64b provided in the sound light side RAM 64. ) Is set (step S412). The value set in the decision time counter 64b is decremented by 1 each time the sound processing MPU 62 starts the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), that is, 4 msec. In addition, a table for final display that determines the mode of light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and sound output control of the speaker unit 45 during the definite display time is read out from the sound side ROM 63 and stored in the sound side RAM 64 (step S413). Although control data for executing light emission control and sound output control for the fixed display time is set in the finalized display table, the display light emitting unit 44 is actually turned off during the fixed display time, and the speaker is The unit 45 is muted. Thereafter, a confirmation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S414). Thereby, in the display CPU 72, each symbol displayed on standby in the symbol display device 41 is displayed as it is determined, and the state displayed in the determined state is maintained for the determined display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to be performed.

  Here, in the main MPU 52, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command has elapsed, the special view display unit 37a corresponds to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process of the current game round. The stop result is displayed, and the state is maintained over the definite display time. The fluctuation display time measured by the main MPU 52 is the same as the fluctuation display time set by the sound MPU 62 in step S409, and the final display time measured by the main MPU 52 is the sound MPU 62 This is the same as the determined display time set in step S412. Therefore, the final display of the symbol is started on the symbol display device 41 at the timing at which the main MPU 52 confirms that the variable display time has elapsed, and at the timing at which the main MPU 52 confirms that the final display time has elapsed. At 41, the symbol display is finished.

  In the table setting process, processes other than the above processes are executed in step S415. In the other processing, for example, when the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is read, and the ending command is received from the main MPU 52. Executes a process for ending the effect for the open / close execution mode. In addition, in a situation where neither the presentation for the game play nor the presentation for the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demonstration display presentation is read out.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the announcement light lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence / absence and contents of the announcement effect by the sound light side MPU 62 is performed and the reach effect drawing for determining the contents of the reach effect The process (step S406) is performed. As a result, there is no need to determine the presence / absence and contents of the notice effect in the main MPU 52, and there is no need to determine the contents of the reach effect, so the processing load of the main MPU 52 is reduced with respect to execution control of the effects for game circulation It is possible to

  However, due to the fact that both the advance notice effect and the reach effect are determined by the lottery by the sound light side MPU 62, the fluctuation display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected by the sound light side MPU 62 is sent to the main side MPU 52. It may happen that it does not coincide with the determined fluctuation display time. That is, when trying to execute the lottery for the notice effect and the lottery for the reach effect while completely matching the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the fluctuation display time that can be determined by the main MPU 52 is made to correspond to each. It is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of advance notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the types of advance presentation effects and the types of reach effects become enormous. Also, even if it is assumed that multiple types of advance notice effects and multiple types of reach effects are prepared at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52, the main MPU 52 If it is attempted to execute the lottery for the notice effect and the lottery for the reach effect while completely matching the determined variable display time, restrictions occur on the design of the notice effect and the reach effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, while allowing the variation display time determined by the control pattern table T3 to not coincide with the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the pachinko machine 10 stands by at the end of the game circulation effect The display and the finalized display are performed well. The configuration will be described below.

  14A and 14B show various part tables T4 to T4 used when setting the control pattern table T3 in the setting process (step S408) of the control pattern table in the table setting process (FIG. 10). It is an explanatory view for explaining T9.

  The parts table T4 to T9 is a table for generating a part or all of one control pattern table T3, and is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 63. Parts tables T4 to T9 are classified into a plurality of table groups, and one parts table read from one table group may be used as it is as one control pattern table T3 from each table group. There is also a case where one control pattern table T3 is generated by combining the read part tables.

  As the table group, a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period exist. In the table group TG1 for the first period, when the variable display of symbols is switched from scroll display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower row symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for game circulation Parts table corresponding to the period from the start of variable display to the start of standby display in symbol row Z3 in the figure below, and in the case where standby display is simultaneously switched in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 by the effect for game circulation The part table corresponding to the whole period of the presentation of the game circulation is included. When the notice effect is executed as the effect for the game, the control data for executing the notice effect is set in the parts table T5, T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, control data for executing the first preview effect is set to the parts table T5 for the first preview effect, and control data for executing the second preview effect is the parts table T6 for the second preview effect. It is set. Further, control data corresponding to a period until standby display is started in the lower row design pattern row Z3 of the game round when no advance notice effect is generated is set in the part table T4 for the occurrence of no advance notice effect. The table group TG1 for the first period includes part tables other than the part tables T4 to T6 exemplified above.

  In the table group TG2 for the second period, the variation display of symbols is switched from scroll display to standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower row symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for gaming A parts table is included which corresponds to a period from the start of the standby display in the lower row design row Z3 to the end of the standby display in the middle symbol row Z2. When the reach effect is executed as the effect for the game, the control data for executing the reach effect is set in the parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, control data for executing the first reach effect is set to the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and control data for executing the second reach effect is the parts table T8 for the second reach effect The control data for performing the third reach effect is set in the parts table T9 for the third reach effect. The table group TG2 for the second period includes parts tables other than the parts tables T7 to T9 exemplified above. The parts table also includes the parts table when the reach effect is not executed.

  In the setting process of the control pattern table in step S408 of the table setting process (FIG. 10), one part table is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound side ROM 63. In this case, for example, it is a game run that results in an out result, and is a game run started when the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage area 54b is four, which is the upper limit number. When the variation display time of the game times corresponds to the variation display time in which switching from the scroll display of the fluctuation display of the symbols to the standby display simultaneously occurs in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the first period table One part table read out from the group TG1 is set as it is as a control pattern table T3.

  On the other hand, when the variation display time of the current game round corresponds to the variation display time in which the switching to the standby display of the variation display of the symbol sequentially occurs in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the advance lottery process (step One part table corresponding to the result of S404) is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound side ROM 63. In addition, if it is the game turn where reach production does not occur, 1 part table which corresponds to this fluctuation indicatory time is read out from the table group TG2 for 2nd period in sound light side ROM63, game turn where reach production occurs If it is, one part table corresponding to the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S405) is read out from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound side ROM 63. Then, a part table read out from the table group TG1 for the first period and a part table read out from the table group TG2 for the second period are combined to set one control pattern table T3.

  In the situation where one part table is set as one control pattern table T3 as it is, the type of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variation display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in a situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are a plurality of types of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variation display time determined by the main MPU 52. It will exist. For example, the advance lottery process (step S404) is performed using the preliminary lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a) and the reach effect lottery process is performed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11 (b). In the situation where (step S406) is executed, part table T4 for non-presence effect non-occurrence, part table T5 for the first pre-notice effect, and part for the second pre-notice effect from the table group TG1 for the first period One of the tables T6 is selected, and a part table T7 for the first reach effect, a parts table T8 for the second reach effect, and a part table T9 for the third reach effect are selected from the table group TG2 for the second period. One is selected.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display time determined by the part tables T4 to T9. FIG. 15 (a1) shows a variation display time determined by parts table T4 for non-presence effect non-occurrence, and FIG. 15 (a2) shows a variation display time set by parts table T5 for first pre-notice effect, FIG. (A3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second preliminary presentation effect. Further, FIG. 15 (b1) shows a fluctuation display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and FIG. 15 (b2) shows a fluctuation display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect, FIG. 15 (b 3) shows the fluctuation display time determined by the parts table T 9 for the third reach effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a1) to 15 (a3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first preview effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for the preview effect non-occurrence. The variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second notice effect is longer by (Ta1) minutes than the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b1) to 15 (b3), the fluctuation display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect is from the fluctuation display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first reach effect. Is also longer by time (Tb1), and the fluctuation display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third reach effect is longer by (Tb2-Tb1) than the fluctuation display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second reach effect.

  In the above configuration, the advance lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A and the reach effect lottery is performed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. When the process (step S406) is executed, the fluctuation display time determined by the control pattern table fluctuates according to the combination of the parts tables T4 to T9 to be used. Specifically, the variation display time when the combination of the part table T4 for non-notice effect non-occurrence and the part table T7 for the first reach effect is selected becomes shortest, and the part table T6 for second notion effect and The variation display time when the combination with the part table T9 for the third reach effect is selected is the longest, but the difference between these variation display times is (Ta2 + Tb2). Therefore, the variation display time determined by the sound light side MPU 62 can be different from the variation command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

  However, the longest fluctuation display time among fluctuation display times that can be selected for one fluctuation command is equal to or less than the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command, that is, the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52 As a result, the notice lottery table T1 and the reach lottery table T2 to be selected for the combination of the variation command and the classification command are set. That is, even when any preliminary drawing table T1 is used or any reach drawing table T2 is used, it corresponds to the control pattern table created by combining a plurality of parts tables. The fluctuation display time is equal to or less than the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52.

  In a configuration in which the longest fluctuation display time among fluctuation display times that can be selected for one fluctuation command is equal to or less than the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the fluctuation time counter of the sound light side RAM 64 The control corresponding to the final pointer set in the control pattern table is ended before the variation display time measured using 64a elapses. On the other hand, when the control corresponding to the final pointer is completed before the fluctuation display time measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a elapses, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned. The standby display is continued. A process for returning the value of the pointer will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the pointer update process, the value of the pointer information to be referred to among the pointer information used when specifying the control data to be used in the control table (for example, control pattern table) currently set is added by one. (Step S501). Thus, in the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next processing cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the value of the pointer information updated this time is set. The corresponding control data is used.

  Thereafter, the value of the pointer information to be referred to is larger than the value of the final pointer defined in the control table, and the control table currently set is the game control pattern table as a condition. (Steps S502 and S503: YES) A correction process of pointer information is executed (step S504). In the correction process of the pointer information, the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display is started is the command selection process (step S302) in the next processing cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The value of the pointer information to be referred to is corrected so as to be used in step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304). Thereby, even if the control corresponding to the final pointer is finished before the fluctuation display time measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a elapses, the standby display is continued until the fluctuation display time elapses It will be.

  When the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed, the standby extension command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When the display CPU 72 receives the standby extension command, the display CPU 72 sets a data table for continuing the standby display, and causes the symbol display device 41 to continue the standby display.

  Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 17, the appearance of the effects for the game routine will be described. FIG. 17 (a) shows the execution period of the game, and FIGS. 17 (b1) and 17 (b2) show the execution control of the effect using the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period. 17 (c1) and 17 (c2) are periods in which execution control of effects using parts tables read from the table group TG2 for the second period is performed. 17 (d1) and 17 (d2) show a standby display period, and FIGS. 17 (e1) and 17 (e2) show a final display period. In FIG. 17 (b1), FIG. 17 (c1), FIG. 17 (d1) and FIG. 17 (e1), the advance lottery process (step S404) is performed using the advance lottery table T1 shown in FIG. A control pattern table (hereinafter referred to as the shortest correspondence table) which becomes the shortest variation display time when the reach effect drawing process (step S406) is executed using the reach drawing table T2 shown in FIG. 11 (b) and being executed. 17 (b2), 17 (c2), 17 (d2), and 17 (e2) use the notice drawing table T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a). When the reach presentation lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11 (b) while the advance lottery process (step S404) is executed. Longest variable display time become the control pattern table (hereinafter, referred to as maximum correspondence table) Te shows the case where is used.

  Whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, the game time is started as shown in FIG. 17 (a) at the timing of t1, and FIG. 17 (b1) The first period is started as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 17 (b1) and FIG. 17 (c1), and the longest correspondence table When it is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing of t21 as shown in FIGS. 17 (b2) and 17 (c2).

  Thereafter, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the second period ends and the standby display period is started as shown in FIG. 17 (c1) and FIG. 17 (d1) at the timing of t12, and the longest correspondence table In the case of being used, as shown in FIG. 17 (c2) and FIG. 17 (d2) at the timing of t22, the second period is ended and the standby display period is started. In this case, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of the standby display defined in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapsed timing of the fluctuation display time, but the pointer update processing (FIG. 16) The standby display is continued by executing the pointer information correction process (step S504).

  Thereafter, regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, the variation measured using the variation time counter 64a of the sound light side RAM 64 at the timing of t2. Display time has passed. Therefore, if the shortest correspondence table is used, as shown in FIG. 17 (d1) and FIG. 17 (e1), the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts, and the longest correspondence table is used If it is, as shown in FIG. 17 (d2) and FIG. 17 (e2), the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts. Then, when the finalized display time elapses at the timing of t3, the finalized display period ends as shown in FIG. 17 (e1) and FIG. 17 (e2), and as shown in FIG. Ends.

  As described above, the advance lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence / absence and contents of the advance effect in the light side MPU 62 and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) for determining the contents of the reach effect are performed. To be executed. As a result, there is no need to determine the presence / absence and contents of the notice effect in the main MPU 52, and there is no need to determine the contents of the reach effect, so the processing load of the main MPU 52 is reduced with respect to execution control of the effects for game circulation. Is taken. Further, it is possible to diversify the effect mode set for one combination of the variation command and type command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

  Corresponding to the result of the advance lottery process and the result of the reach effect lottery process so that the variable display time determined by the control pattern table may be different even when the same change command is received from the main MPU 52 A control pattern table is set. Thereby, it is possible to realize the reduction of the processing load of the main MPU 52 and the diversification of the presentation mode while suitably performing the design of the advance presentation effect and the reach effect.

  Even when the variation display time determined by the control pattern table selected with the same variation command as a trigger can be different, the symbol display device at the timing corresponding to the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52 The mode of the variable display of the symbol in 41 is switched from the standby display to the finalized display. Thereby, even if the variation display time determined by the control pattern table may be different, the effect for the game circulation in the symbol display device 41 is ended at the timing corresponding to the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52 It becomes possible.

  In a configuration in which the control pattern table to be used can be different even when the same change command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest change display among the change display times determined by those control pattern tables The time corresponds to less than the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52. When the control pattern table corresponding to the fluctuation display time becomes shorter than the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52, until the fluctuation display time determined by the main MPU 52 is reached. The variation display mode of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is maintained in the standby display. As a result, even when any control pattern table is to be used, switching from the standby display to the final display occurs in the symbol display device 41 at the end of the game run, for example, a predetermined effect It is possible to prevent occurrence of an event that the finalized display starts suddenly in the middle of the event or an event that the finalized display of the symbol continues for a longer period than the normal finalized display period.

  The sound light side RAM 64 is provided with a fluctuation time counter 64a, and the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received from the main MPU 52 is set to the fluctuation time counter 64a, and the fluctuation time counter 64a The variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is switched to the finalized display when the variation display time being measured using has elapsed. Thus, in a configuration in which the variation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the main MPU 52 displays a command indicating the start timing of the definite display. It is possible to start the finalized display at a timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, even without transmission from the above.

  The following configuration may be applied as a configuration in which the variation display time determined by the control pattern table may be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52.

  -Various parts tables T7 to T9 included in table group TG2 for the second period are controlled corresponding to a time longer than the longest fluctuation display time assumed as a situation where these parts tables T7 to T9 are used The data may be set, and control data for performing standby display may be set as control data corresponding to a rear period following the end timing. In this case, it is not necessary to execute correction processing for extending the execution period of the standby display on the control pattern table. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the variation display time of the game time has passed.

  A control pattern table for performing execution control of effects after the start of standby display is provided separately from a control pattern table for performing execution control of effects before the start of standby display, and the standby display is started In this case, it may be configured to switch to a state in which execution control of effect is performed based on the control pattern table for standby display. In this case, the control pattern table for standby display can be used in various situations by using the same control pattern table for standby display, regardless of the number of games played. In the configuration, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table for performing standby display over a predetermined period, and the standby display needs to be performed over a period longer than the predetermined period. Alternatively, a control pattern table for standby display may be used as a loop. In addition, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table that enables standby display to be executed over the longest period assumed as the period for which standby display is performed, and the variation display time of the game times is set. If it has elapsed, the use of the control pattern table for standby display may be terminated halfway.

  The measurement of the time for starting the finalized display is not limited to the configuration in which the sound light side MPU 62 is executed, and when it is time to start the finalized display, the sound side MPU 62 from the main side MPU 52 A command corresponding to that may be transmitted, and when the sound light side MPU 62 receives the command, processing may be performed to cause the sound light side MPU 62 to start a finalized display.

  -In the configuration in which the control pattern table to be used can be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation among the variation display times determined by those control pattern tables Instead of the configuration in which the display time corresponds to the variable display time or less determined by the main MPU 52, the main variable MPU 52 determines the longest variable display time among the variable display times determined by the control pattern table The time may be longer than the display time. In this case, it is necessary to end the effect during the execution of the effect for the game. Therefore, in such a case, a forcible termination effect is generated, and the content corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and type lottery of the corresponding gaming round corresponding to the forcible termination effect, more specifically, the game The content corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the table setting process (FIG. 10) of the round may be notified. More specifically, even when the effect such as the reach effect corresponding to the period prior to the standby display is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the timing of the variation display time has elapsed for the game The combination of the symbols determined as the stop result may be suddenly stopped and displayed, and the finalized display may be performed in the state where the combination of the symbols is stopped and displayed.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle by the display CPU 72, specifically, in a cycle of 20 msec.

  When the VDP 76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dots at the upper left corner of the display surface P, and on the horizontal line including the dots at one end An image signal is sequentially output to the arranged dots, and an image signal is output from left to right dots in order from the top to each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs the V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec which is the same as the image update cycle of one frame. In this regard, the V interrupt process can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was activated, the V interrupt process is newly activated.

  In the V interrupt process, first, a command analysis process is executed (step S601). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives a strobe signal from the sound side MPU 62, the display CPU 72 executes command interrupt processing regardless of what processing is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 77 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 73.

  Thereafter, the command corresponding process is executed (step S603) on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S602: YES). In the command handling process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74. In the execution target table, when displaying a moving image corresponding to a received command on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined. Information group.

  As the command received by the display CPU 72 from the sound side MPU 62, the command at the start of variation already described, the command at the start of the notice effect start, the command at the start of normal reach, the command at the start of super reach, the command at the start of the fixed effect, There are a command at the start of standby display, a standby extension command, and a confirmation display start command. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the game circulation effects corresponding to the respective commands in the symbol display device 41 is read out.

  If a negative determination is made in step S602, or if the process of step S603 is performed, task processing is performed (step S604). In task processing, by referring to the control data of the current processing cycle in the execution target table set as the usage target, a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 76 to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing. Set up various data necessary for operation. Specifically, address data of an area where image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74, address information of an area to which image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75, and image data of a control target are used as the various data. Information of the frame areas 82a and 82b for which drawing data is to be created, coordinate information for writing image data to be controlled in the frame areas 82a and 82b for creation, and scale information for writing the image data, Also, there is information of a uniform α value (semi-transparent value) when writing the image data.

  Thereafter, the drawing list output process is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing cycle is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task processing is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task processing is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to the drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

  The task processing of step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, setting processing for control start is executed (step S701). In the setting process for control start, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 73 searches an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in order to control the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one to the individual image grasped as the control start target Reserve free buffer space to Furthermore, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameter information for control start according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  Thereafter, the control update target is grasped (step S702). The control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed, and is an individual image that may be included in an image of one frame after the current processing cycle.

  Thereafter, the background calculation process is executed (step S703). In the background operation processing, the control update target of this time is grasped among the still image and the sprite for background which are to constitute the background image. In addition, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data specification and the like are calculated and derived for the control update object grasped. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  Thereafter, the effect calculation process is executed (step S704). In the effect operation processing, the control update target of this time is grasped among the effect sprites that constitute the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach effect, advance notice effect, and jackpot effect. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the control update target grasped. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  Thereafter, symbol operation processing is executed (step S705). In the symbol calculation processing, among the symbols to be subjected to variable display in each game run, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the control update target grasped. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the work RAM 73 in the area secured corresponding to each individual image.

  Thereafter, processing for grasping the drawing instruction target is executed (step S706). In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, among the individual images that have been subjected to the control update target in the calculation processes of steps S703, S704, and S705, an image for one frame corresponding to the generation instruction of the current drawing data Execute processing to grasp the contained individual image. The said grasping | ascertainment is performed by performing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the coordinate of various individual images, a rotation angle, and a scale. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. Thus, it is necessary to sort individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by setting only individual images to be displayed, instead of using the individual images specified in the drawing list as all individual images for which control has been started. Also, even if it is not sorted, there is no need to perform unnecessary drawing processing on individual images that are not to be displayed. Thereby, the processing load of VDP 76 can be reduced.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  The VDP 76 sets the value of the register 92 based on the command sent from the display CPU 72, creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, And the process which outputs an image signal to the symbol display apparatus 41 based on the drawing data created in flame | frame area | region 82a, 82b is performed.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time the drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 when the output start timing of the image signal is determined in advance.

  The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. FIGS. 20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information is information of the target buffer, which is information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b the drawing data for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the drawing list is to be drawn. Information is set. Further, in the header information, information of presence / absence of designation of decoding and address of moving image data to be decoded is set.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set to be the numerical value information of serial numbers, and the information of the image data to be used in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information is set. In addition, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame are to be drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as graphic sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20A, background data is set as the first drawing target, sprite data A is set as the second, sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, and then sprite data A is written to overlap the background data, and sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image → effect image → pattern.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20B, the parameter P (1) of the background data is information of the address of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area where the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating a position on a virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, rotation angle information indicating a rotation angle on a virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and background data Information indicating the magnification when writing to the frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the initial state, and the uniform .alpha. Value indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when the background data is written And information of α data specification indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the application target. The types of parameters are the same as for sprite data A, as shown in FIG.

  The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels constituting the image data, but information of one coordinate is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. In VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and at the time of arranging the image data, make the one pixel at the center be on the designated coordinate. . As a result, the information capacity (that is, the data amount) of the information of the coordinates to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. In addition, since the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 do not have to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one central pixel, and may be, for example, a pixel at an upper left or upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the corner pixels as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

  The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. The α data can make the transmission information different for each pixel within the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting the α value.

  By setting α values and α data uniformly as described above, in a situation where it is sufficient to control the transparency of background data and sprite data uniformly for all pixels instead of finely controlling in pixel units. While it is possible to reduce the necessary data capacity by being able to cope with the uniform α value, it is also possible to finely control the transparency on a pixel basis by applying the α data.

  The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether creation of drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is completed. If creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S802 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S803, the process for receiving is performed.

  In the response processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from which frame area 82a and 82b the drawing data of one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list.

  In the following step S804, content grasping processing is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the reading target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, in the content comprehension processing, the type of image data initially set as a rendering target in the rendering list is comprehended, and various parameter information of the image data is comprehended. In the writing process, based on the grasped result of the content grasping process in step S804, the image data of the current drawing object is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation object.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is in the process of being created, update processing of the drawing list counter is executed in step S806. Thereby, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the process of step S804 and step S805 is performed on the switched image data. That is, by performing the drawing process a plurality of times, drawing data of an image of one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data are processed in one drawing process may be used, or the drawing process may be performed. The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing cycle, and may be configured to process different numbers of image data in each processing cycle of drawing processing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or after the process of step S805 is performed, it is determined in step S807 whether or not image signal output for one frame has been completed in the display circuit 94. If not completed, the present drawing processing is ended as it is, and if completed, the V interruption signal is outputted to the display CPU 72 at step S808, and then the present drawing processing is ended.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec. Further, although an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data, the double buffer method is adopted as described above, so the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the corresponding frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of an image signal of one frame is completed. In this case, the frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are regulated so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Configuration for sharing an execution target table>
Next, a configuration for sharing an execution target table will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set in the symbol display device 41 in each game run (see FIG. 4A). A plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set such as upper row, middle row and lower row. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, nine types of main symbols of "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and furthermore, numbers are not attached between the respective main symbols The sub symbol is arranged one by one. And, when the game time is started, from the display mode of the symbols finally displayed stopped in the previous game time, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to scroll in a predetermined direction according to the arrangement order of the symbols The variable display of the symbol is performed. Thereafter, the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the symbols finally displayed in stop in each game turn may be different, the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be different when the game turn is started. .

  An example of the variation display mode of the symbol will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22 (a) shows an execution period of game times, FIG. 22 (b) shows an acceleration period in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and FIG. 22 (c) shows a high speed period in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, 22 (d) shows the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22 (e) shows the low speed period of the lower pattern row Z3, and FIG. 22 (f) shows the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2.

  At the timing of t1, the game play is started as shown in FIG. At the timing of the said t1, as shown in FIG.22 (b), the moving image display which the variation display speed of a symbol becomes high gradually in all the symbol row Z1-Z3 is performed. The variable display speed in this case is a variable display speed capable of identifying or easily identifying the type of symbol displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As described above, the presence of the acceleration period makes it possible to set the start mode when the variable display of the symbol is started in each game period to a certain mode, and the player is notified that the game period has been started. Is easier to recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22 (b), and as shown in FIG. 22 (c), it becomes a high-speed period where fluctuation display is performed at high speed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In the high-speed period, the fluctuation display speed of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 becomes the fluctuation display speed in which the kind of the symbol can not be identified or is hard to be identified. Adjustment of the type of symbol displayed on the display surface P is performed in the high speed period. Thus, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is displayed in the configuration in which the stop result of the current game is determined regardless of the types of symbols displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game. It is possible to adjust the types of symbols displayed on standby and displayed in a stand-by manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 22D, the fluctuation display speed of the symbols is switched from the high speed to the low speed in the upper pattern row Z1. When low-speed display is performed, the variable display of symbols is performed at a variable display speed that makes it possible to identify or easily identify the type of symbol. In this case, low speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and high speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22D, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and in the upper symbol row Z1, the scroll display of the symbols ends and the standby display is started. Further, at the timing of the time t4, as shown in FIG. In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the lower figure design row Z3, and high-speed display is continued in the middle design row Z2, and standby display is continued in the upper design row Z1.

  Thereafter, as shown in timing chart (e) of t5, when the low speed period of the lower figure pattern row Z3 ends, in the lower figure pattern row Z3, the scroll display of the symbols ends and the standby display is started. Further, at the timing of the time t5, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the fluctuation display speed of the symbol is switched from the high speed to the low speed in the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

  Thereafter, at time t6, the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 ends as shown in FIG. 22 (f), and in the middle symbol row Z2, the scroll display of the symbols ends and standby display is started. In this case, the standby display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then the still display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  At the time of variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the execution target table stored in advance in the memory module 74 is read out, and the type of symbols displayed on the display surface P is determined by the display CPU 72 according to the execution target table In addition, various parameters such as the arrangement position of the symbol to be displayed are determined. Here, the types of symbols displayed stop at each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the start of each game run, and the types of symbols displayed stop at each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the end of each game run, It may be different every game time. For example, if variable display of symbols is started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (a), variable display of symbols is started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (b) There is also. In addition, for example, the game times may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (a), and the game times may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23 (b). In this case, when preparing the execution target table in advance according to each pattern, it is necessary to prepare the execution target table corresponding to each of the possible display modes at the start of the variable display of the game times. As well as being generated, it is necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the modes that can be taken as the stop display mode at the end of the game run. Then, the number of types of execution target tables will be extremely large, and the storage capacity required for storing the execution target tables in advance will increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the common execution target table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the variation display of the game times, and the common pachinko machine 10 is common regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game times It is configured to use the execution target table. The common execution target table will be described.

  The execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period. In this case, an execution target table is provided so as to be common to all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the acceleration period. On the other hand, the high speed period and the low speed period are not provided in common among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and an execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, the execution target table includes the presence or absence of reach effect for the acceleration period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the high speed period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the low speed period of upper symbol row Z1 and the low speed period of lower symbol row Z3. It is used regardless of, but it is used only when reach production does not occur about a low speed period of middle design pattern row Z2. When reach effect occurs, a common execution target table is not used for the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2, and a dedicated execution target table corresponding to each reach effect is used.

  The execution target table is stored in advance in the memory module 74. More specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24A, the memory module 74 has an acceleration target table stored in advance for controlling variable display of symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the acceleration period. A storage area 102 for a period, a first high-speed period storage area 102 in which an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 in a high-speed period is stored in advance, and an upper symbol row Z1 for a low-speed period A storage area 103 for the first low speed period in which an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols is stored in advance, and an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 in a high speed period are stored in advance Storage area 104 for the second high speed period, and an execution target table for controlling the fluctuation display of the symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 in the low speed period are stored in advance (2) A low speed period memory area 105 and a third high speed period memory area 106 in which an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols in the lower figure pattern row Z3 in the high speed period is stored in advance A third low-speed period storage area 107 in which an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols Z3 is stored in advance is provided.

  The acceleration period, the high speed period and the low speed period are not constant in relation to the variation display time of the game time, and there are a plurality of types so that the length of the period exists. In this case, there is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, and the acceleration period controllable by the execution target table for the acceleration period has a variation display time of the game time Among the plurality of types of acceleration periods determined by the relationship with the above, it is a period longer than the longest acceleration period. As a result, even if any type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the variation display time of the game, it is possible to use the execution target table for one type of acceleration period.

  Only one type of execution target table for the high speed period is stored in each of the first high speed period storage area 102, the second high speed period storage area 104, and the third high speed period storage area 106. The high-speed period controllable by the execution target table for the first high-speed period stored in the first high-speed period storage area 102 is determined by the relationship with the variation display time of the game times of plural types of upper symbol row Z1. It is a period longer than the longest high speed period among high speed periods. In addition, the high-speed period controllable by the execution target table for the second high-speed period stored in the second high-speed period storage area 104 can be controlled by the relationship between the display time and the variation display time of the game It is a period longer than the longest high speed period among the various high speed periods. In addition, the high speed period controllable by the execution target table for the third high speed period stored in the third high speed period memory area 106 is a plurality of lower figure pattern row Z3 determined in relation to the variation display time of the game It is a period longer than the longest high speed period among the various high speed periods. Thereby, even if any kind of high speed period is selected in relation to the variation display time of the game times in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, execution for one type of high speed period for each of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 It becomes possible to use the target table.

  In each of the first low speed period storage area 103, the second low speed period storage area 105, and the third low speed period storage area 107, plural types of execution target tables for low speed period are stored. That is, a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low speed period are stored in the first low speed period storage area 103 so as to correspond to the types of low speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 one by one. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the second low speed period are stored in the period storage area 105 in a one-to-one correspondence with the types of low speed periods of the middle symbol row Z2, and the third low speed period storage area 107 A plurality of types of execution target tables for the third low speed period are stored so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of low speed period of the pattern row Z3 in the lower figure. Since the execution target table for the low speed period is prepared for each type of low speed period as described above, the variable display of symbols is controlled using the execution target table for the low speed period to cope with each low speed period. It is possible to execute standby display of the symbol and stationary display of the symbol at the timing of

  FIG. 25 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for acceleration period stored in advance in the acceleration period storage area 101, and FIG. 25 (b) is a storage area 102 for the first high speed period. 26 is an explanatory diagram for describing the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period stored in advance, and FIG. 26 is an execution view for the first low speed period stored in advance in the first low speed period storage area 103. It is an explanatory view for explaining object table T12. Although the execution target table for the second high-speed period and the execution target table for the third high-speed period are different in the maximum value of pointer information from the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period, the other points are the first This is the same as the execution target table T11 for the high speed period. Also, an execution target table of a type different from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period stored in the first low speed period storage area 103, an execution target table for the second low speed period, and a third low speed period The execution target table is the same as the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period, although the maximum value of the pointer information is different from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a), 25 (b) and 26, pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame is set in each execution target table T10 to T12. In correspondence with the information, the adjustment area of the display symbol and the information of the contents of the task are set.

  In the adjustment area of the display symbol, information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set. Specifically, information corresponding to one symbol is set in the corresponding symbol column Z1 to Z3 in the adjustment area of the display symbol. Here, three symbols will be displayed simultaneously in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, but the information set in the adjustment area of the display symbol is the type of symbol existing at the head in the moving direction of the symbols It corresponds to the information of. Further, as already described, the total number of symbols arranged in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different. Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are a combination of the main symbol and the sub symbol 18 While each symbol is arranged, in the middle symbol row Z2, twenty symbols are arranged by combining the main symbol and the sub symbol. Therefore, when the execution target table is used to control variable display of symbols in upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3, the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponds to any of "1" to "18". Information is set, and when the execution target table is used to control variable display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the adjustment area of the display symbols corresponds to any of "1" to "20". Information is set.

  For example, when "1" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the predetermined pointer information in the execution target table for controlling the fluctuation display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1, the predetermined pointer information The main symbol of "1", the sub-symbol between "1" and "9", and the main symbol of "9" are to be displayed in the frame corresponding to. Also, when "2" is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol, in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information, the sub symbol between "1" and "9", the main symbol of "9" , And the sub-symbol between "9" and "8" is to be displayed.

  In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scrolled as described above, but the types of symbols to be scroll-displayed become the same across a plurality of frames. Therefore, in the adjustment area of the display symbol, information of the same symbol is set across a plurality of continuous pointer information. Then, the information set in the adjustment area of the display symbol is changed as the value of the pointer information increases, so that the type of symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed.

  Information on task contents includes coordinate information indicating the arrangement position of the symbol to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the frame area 82a and 82b of the write target in the frame buffer 82) and the size of the symbol Parameter information such as scale information indicating. In this case, in the coordinate information, information for determining the arrangement positions of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding frame is set. Therefore, it is possible to specify the information on the coordinates corresponding to each of the three symbols to be displayed specified from the information on the adjustment area of the display symbol from the information on the contents of the task. For example, when “1” is set in the adjustment area of the display symbols of a plurality of continuous pointer information in the execution target table applied to the upper design row Z1, the information of the content of the task corresponding to the plurality of pointer information The arrangement position of the main symbol of “1”, the sub symbol between “1” and “9”, and the main symbol of “9” in the corresponding symbol row gradually changes in the direction of scroll display. Such coordinate information is set.

  In the configuration in which a plurality of symbols corresponding to the information set in the adjustment area of the display symbol are displayed as described above, and parameter information of the plurality of symbols is set in the information of the task content, the adjustment area of the display symbol After the execution target table is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73, the area is a rewritable area under the control of the display CPU 72. This rewriting is performed according to the type of symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the timing when the use of the corresponding execution target table is started. Further, by performing scroll display of symbols, the types of three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 change with the passage of time. The switching timings of the three symbol types to be displayed are predetermined in each execution target table T10 to T12. Therefore, when rewriting the adjustment area of the display symbol, the pointer information corresponding to the next switching timing from the first pointer information is regarded as one pointer group, and is included between the one switching timing and the next switching timing. When the pointer information is one pointer group, the same symbol information is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to each pointer information included in one pointer group, and different symbol groups are used among different pointer groups Information is set.

  Information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol in each execution target table T10 to T12 as described above, but the information to be set in the adjustment region of the display symbol is displayed CPU 72 The work RAM 73 is provided with a first adjustment counter 111, a second adjustment counter 112, and a third adjustment counter 113, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. There is. The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3. .

  In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information on the type of symbol existing at the head when the symbol moves from right to left in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set. The display CPU 72 changes the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 each time the symbols existing at the beginning of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are changed to the symbols in the next order Update to later symbol type information. Thus, the information set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 always corresponds to the type of symbol existing at the beginning of the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3. When the display CPU 72 starts control of variable display of symbols by a predetermined execution target table, the display CPU 72 displays information corresponding to the information of the type of symbols set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 in the predetermined execution target table Set to the adjustment area of the symbol.

  When starting variable display of symbols in upper symbol row Z1, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), when the leading symbol of upper symbol row Z1 is the main symbol of "3", the value of first adjustment counter 111 Is "5". Here, the relationship between the value set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of the first symbol will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG. As described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a total of 18 symbols arranged by combining the main symbol and the sub symbol, while the middle symbol row Z2 has the main symbol and the sub symbol Since a total of 20 symbols are arranged in combination, the number of types of values that can be taken in the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 differ.

  In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), values of “1” to “18” can be taken, and each value is upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol There is a one-to-one correspondence with a total of 18 symbols in each row Z3. In this case, the odd number corresponds to the main symbol, and the even number corresponds to the sub symbol. Further, while the main symbols are arranged in the descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left in upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols in the lower row with respect to the scroll direction from right to left in lower pattern row Z3. The relationship between the values that can be taken by the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 and the type of the first symbol is the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. And the same.

  In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), values of “1” to “20” can be taken, and each value is one pair with each of a total of 20 symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. It corresponds by 1. In this case, the relationship between the values “1” to “18” and the type of the first symbol is the same as in the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. In addition, the value of "19" corresponds to the main symbol of "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1", and the value of "20" is relevant. It corresponds to the sub-pattern between the main symbol of "4" and the main symbol of "1".

  The setting mode of the information with respect to the adjustment area of the display symbol will be described by taking, as an example, a case of setting an aspect of variation display of symbols in the acceleration period, high speed period and low speed period in the upper symbol row Z1. FIG. 28 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, and FIG. 28 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for describing the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period. In addition, the setting mode of the information to the adjustment area of the display pattern of the execution target table corresponding to each of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower figure row Z3 is the upper symbol row Z1 while the arrangement of the symbols is in the descending order The symbol row Z2 and the lower row symbol row Z3 are different in that the arrangement mode of symbols is in ascending order, but the other points are the setting manner of information to the adjustment area of the display symbol of the execution target table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 It is the same.

  In the case where the effect for game use is started in the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “5”. Further, in the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged such that the main symbols are in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28A, in the adjustment area of the display symbols in the table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, which is the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period read out from the acceleration period storage area 101. , "5" corresponding to the current leading symbol is set for the first pointer group, and the symbol to be controlled in this case is the main symbol of "3" and between "3" and "2" And a main symbol of "2". In addition, for the pointer group of the next order, "4" corresponding to the symbol of the next order is set to the symbol of the current top, and for the pointer group of the next order, the next order The symbol "3" corresponding to the symbol of the next order is set for the symbol of "," "2" corresponding to the symbol of the next order with respect to the symbol of the next order with respect to the next group of pointers "Is set. That is, numerical setting is performed on the adjustment area of the display symbol so that the numbers are in descending order toward the rear pointer group.

  When control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol row Z1 is completed by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period in which the adjustment area of the display symbol is set as described above, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes "1". ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period read from the first high speed period storage area 102, as shown in FIG. Is set to "1" corresponding to the current leading symbol, and "18" corresponding to the next symbol to the current leading symbol is set for the next-pointed pointer group . That is, in the upper symbol row Z1, 18 symbols circulate while scrolling from right to left, so in the next order with respect to the pointer group for which “1” is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol "18" is set to the adjustment area of the display symbol in the pointer group which exists. In addition, for the pointer group after that, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a sequential number and in descending numerical order.

  Here, as described above, the high-speed period controllable by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is the longest among the plural types of high-speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 determined in relation to the variation display time of the game The period of high speed is over. In this case, when it is time to use the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, all of the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, regardless of the current high speed period. The control by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is ended when control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the high-speed period is completed although the setting of the value is performed for The control is switched to control by the execution target table T12. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period is ended.

  The same applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. That is, as described above, the acceleration period controllable by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is the longest among the plurality of types of acceleration periods of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 determined in relation to the variation display time of the game It is a period more than the acceleration period. In this case, when it is time to use the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, the values for all the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period regardless of the current acceleration period. Setting is performed, but when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period ends, and the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period Switch to control by In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is ended.

  When the pointer group for which “17” is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol in FIG. 28B corresponds to the end timing of the high speed period of this time, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “16” It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, in the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period read from the first low speed period storage area 103, the current state for the first pointer group "16" corresponding to the leading symbol of is set, and for the pointer group thereafter, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a sequential number and in descending numerical order.

  As described above, the values of the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target tables T10 to T12 are set using the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113. Thereby, even if the execution target tables T10 to T12 are also used for plural types of situations, the variable display of the symbols is controlled in a mode corresponding to the types of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is possible to

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of symbols while using the execution target table will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing command corresponding processing executed by the display CPU 72. The command corresponding process is executed in step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  If a command for start of variation is received from the MPU 52 of the main control unit 50 (step S901: YES), the execution target table for the acceleration period is read out from the storage area 101 for acceleration period into the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, since the execution target table for the acceleration period is read out in correspondence with each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the work RAM 73 has a total of three execution target tables for the acceleration period. Is read out. However, the execution target tables for these three acceleration periods are all the same type of table.

  Thereafter, execution target tables for the high speed period are read out from the high speed period storage areas 102, 104, 106 to the work RAM 73 for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S903). Specifically, the execution target table for the first high speed period corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is read out from the first high speed period storage area 102, and the second high speed period storage area 104 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2 (2) The execution target table for the high speed period is read out, and the execution target table for the third high speed period corresponding to the lower design row Z3 is read out from the third high speed period storage area 106.

  Thereafter, it is determined from the information of the fluctuation display time in the current gaming round included in the command for fluctuation start whether the reach effect is generated in the current gaming round (step S904). If the reach effect is not generated (step S904: NO), the upper target symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 each have execution target tables for a low speed period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game run The work area is read from the low speed period storage areas 103, 105, 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S905). As described above, a plurality of low speed periods are set in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but the low speed periods correspond to the variation display time of the game. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game is read. Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 this time) is read out from the first low speed period storage area 103, and the second low speed period The execution target table for the second low speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low speed period of the current middle symbol row Z2) is read out from the memory area 105, and the current fluctuation display is read from the third low speed period memory area 107. The execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the time (that is, the low speed period of the present figure lower row Z3) is read out.

  When reach effect occurs (step S904: YES), the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game turn for each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 for the first low speed period It is read from the area 103 and the third low speed period storage area 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S906). Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 this time) is read out from the first low speed period storage area 103, and the third low speed period The execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the current fluctuation display time (that is, the low speed period of the present figure lower row Z3) is read out from the memory area 107. Thereafter, a dedicated execution target table corresponding to the current reach effect is read out from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S 907).

  When the process of step S 905 or step S 907 is executed, the information corresponding to the value of each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is displayed for the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table for each acceleration period read in step S 902 The setting process is executed (step S908). In the setting process, regarding the execution target table for the acceleration period read out to control the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the first of the adjustment areas of the display symbols corresponding to the first pointer group The value of the adjustment counter 111 is set, and for the pointer group thereafter, the value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a sequential number for each pointer group and in descending numerical order. In addition, for the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the fluctuation display of symbols in middle symbol column Z2, the second adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group A value of 112 is set, and for the pointer group thereafter, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a serial number for each pointer group and in ascending order of the numbers. In addition, for the execution target table for the acceleration period read out to control the fluctuation display of the symbol in the lower row design symbol Z3, the third adjustment counter for the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the first pointer group A value of 113 is set, and for the pointer group thereafter, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so as to be a serial number for each pointer group and in ascending order of the numbers.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, or if the process of step S908 is performed, another process is performed (step S909). In other processes, when a command different from the command for change start is received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed.

  Next, the normal variation calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal variation computing process is executed in the symbol computing process of step S705 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where effects for game circulation are being executed and reach effects are not performed. .

  First, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 is the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group of one in the pointer group that is the current reference target in the execution target table that is the use target for the upper symbol row Z1 The case is true. When it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is decremented by 1 (step S1002). Then, when the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after the one subtraction is "0" (step S1003: YES), the maximum value "18" is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1003). S1004).

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113. The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 is the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group of one in the pointer group which is the current reference target in the execution target table which is the use target with respect to the middle symbol row Z2 The case is true. The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 is the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group of one in the pointer group which is the current reference target in the execution target table which is the use target with respect to the lower figure pattern row Z3 The case is true.

  If it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), the value of the adjustment counters 112, 113 to be updated this time is incremented by one (step S1006). In this case, if only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 is to be updated, then both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 are to be updated. In some cases. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated after the one addition exceeds the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is “20”, and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is “18”. If the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated exceed the maximum value, the value of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 whose maximum value has been exceeded is set to the minimum value “1” (step S1008).

  In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a table at the switching timing in the execution target table to be used in each of upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2 and lower symbol row Z3. . If the switching timing is the acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the acceleration period is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game cycle. The case of information is applicable. Since the acceleration period is constant in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the acceleration period to the execution target table for the high speed period occurs simultaneously in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, if the switching timing is a high speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high speed period is the end timing of the high speed period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game round in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3. The case is the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to. Since the high-speed period is different in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the high-speed period to the execution target table for the low-speed period occurs individually in each symbol row Z1 to Z3.

  If it is the switching timing of the execution target table for any of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S1009: YES), the change processing of the execution target table to be used is executed (step S1010) ). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In the change process, when the execution target table for the acceleration period is to be used, the execution target for the high speed period that has already been read to the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command handling process (FIG. 30). When the use target is changed to the table and the execution target table for the high-speed period is the use target, it has already been read to the work RAM 73 in steps S905 to S907 in the command handling process (FIG. 30). Change the usage target to the execution target table.

  Thereafter, setting processing based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed on the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table newly determined to be used. The contents of the setting process are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. As a result, the contents of the execution target table newly determined to be used are changed to an aspect corresponding to the display contents of the current symbol.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if the process of step S1011 is performed, pointer update processing is performed (step S1012). In the pointer update process, the pointer information to be referred to in the execution target table to be used is updated to the pointer information of the next order for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. Do. However, the pointer information update process is not executed for the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in which the execution target table to be used has been changed in the current processing cycle of the normal variation calculation process.

  Thereafter, the type of image data corresponding to the symbols to be displayed for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is grasped (step S1013). At the time of this grasping, from the value of the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the present pointer information in the execution target table to be used in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol row Z1 corresponding to the execution target table While grasping the kind of top design in Z3, grasp the kind of two kinds of subsequent designs. Further, such grasping of the type of symbol is performed for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  After that, various parameter information of all the symbols to be displayed this time is grasped from the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table to be used in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes the coordinates of three symbols in upper symbol row Z1, the coordinates of three symbols in middle symbol row Z2, and the coordinates of three symbols in lower symbol row Z3.

  As described above, when the normal variation calculation process is executed, the figure grasped in step S1013 is set as the drawing object in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) . Further, parameter information to be applied to the symbols is set in the drawing list.

  As described above, since the execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols is shared in various situations, the number of execution target tables stored in advance in the memory module 74 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the execution target table in the memory module 74 in advance. In addition, even if the execution target table is shared, the types of symbols to be displayed are adjusted using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, so that the variable display of symbols can be appropriately controlled. It becomes possible.

  The execution target table for the acceleration period is only one type, and the acceleration period controllable by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the longest among the plurality of types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the variation display time of the game It is a period more than the acceleration period. Then, regardless of the type of acceleration period, the execution target table for the acceleration period is used, and the range of the pointer information referenced in the execution target table changes in relation to the type of the acceleration period to be executed. Be done. This makes it possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period, and to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the execution target table in the memory module 74 in advance. In particular, an execution target table for one type of acceleration period is commonly used for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

  The execution target table for high speed period prepared for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is only one type, and the high speed period controllable by the execution target table for each high speed period corresponds to the corresponding symbol row Z1 The period is longer than the longest high-speed period among the plurality of types of high-speed periods determined in relation to the variation display time of the game time for Z3. Then, regarding one pattern row Z1 to Z3, even if it is any high speed period, the execution target table for one type of high speed period is used, and the execution target in relation to the type of the high speed period to be executed The range of pointer information referenced in the table is changed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period, and to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the execution target table in the memory module 74 in advance.

  As described above, even if the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period and the execution target tables for the high speed period is reduced, switching of the execution target tables is performed in the last order of the pointers to be referred to It is performed at the timing when the control by the pointer information of is completed. As a result, in the execution target table that is newly used, it is sufficient to start control from the pointer information of the first turn in one pointer group, so it is possible to switch the execution target table appropriately.

  In each execution target table, adjustment areas of display symbols are set in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of tasks in each pointer information. And the kind of symbol to which the content of each task is applied is changed by adjusting the information set to the adjustment area of this display symbol. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the kind of the design of the object to which the information of the contents of the task is applied at each update timing only by referring to each execution target table.

  In addition, when the use of the execution target table is started, information on the type of symbol is set for each of the adjustment areas of the display symbols included in the execution target table. Since it is not necessary to perform processing for changing the information of the adjustment area of the display symbol about the execution object table in the middle of execution of control using the execution object table by this, it is in the middle of execution of the effect for game circulation It is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

<Another form of sharing the execution target table>
-It is good also as composition which is not provided with the adjustment area of a display symbol in a table for execution. In this case, by making the execution target table at least the information of the trigger for switching the values of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the information of the task, the type of symbols to be displayed is for adjustment It becomes possible to grasp from the counters 111 to 113. According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the execution target table in that there is no need to set the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table.

  -When individual images of all types are controlled in a control period using one execution target table, the types of individual images to be applied to the execution target table are always fixed, but the execution target table The order of the individual images to be applied may be different for each game. Therefore, in this case, although the type of the individual image to be applied to the execution target table is not adjusted, the order of the individual images to be applied to the execution target table is adjusted.

  The configuration in which the execution target table is also used as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the specific variation display is performed using only one type of individual images among a plurality of types of individual images. In this case, in the execution target table, information for determining the operation content of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variation display is set in time series, and the type of the individual image to which the information is applied is adjusted. The Rukoto.

  · A configuration in which an execution target table for acceleration period is provided for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 instead of a configuration in which an execution object table for acceleration period is provided in common to all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 It may be Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided so that the execution object table for high-speed periods may be used commonly with respect to all the symbol row Z1-Z3.

  The switching of the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high speed period is limited to the configuration performed at the timing when the control by the last pointer information in the pointer group to be referred to is completed. Alternatively, it may be timing when control by other pointer information is completed. However, it is preferable that the timing at which the switching occurs is set as the timing at which the control by the pointer information in a predetermined order in the pointer group is completed, regardless of which acceleration period or high speed period.

<Configuration for performing loop display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing loop display effect will be described.

  32 (a) and 32 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32A, the loop display character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 which enables notification of the contents corresponding to the result of the acceptance / rejection determination in the MPU 62 of the main control device 50. At the same time, the loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In the loop display effect, the types of symbols G1 to G3 are different from those in FIG. 4 (b), and the variation display of symbols in a plurality of symbol rows is also in the case of FIG. 4 (b) Is a different aspect. Specifically, cube-shaped base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed so as to be arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and symbols G1 to G3 with numbers are displayed on the front of each base symbol image G6 to G8. Ru. Then, at the time of the variable display of the symbols, the base symbol images G6 to G8 rotate in the vertical direction about the rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the centers of the base symbol images G6 to G8, and each base The symbols G1 to G3 displayed on the front of the symbol images G6 to G8 are changed. Although the change opportunity between the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 4 (b) and the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 32 (a) is arbitrary, for example, a plurality of display modes exist and the first display mode In the second display mode, the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 4 (b) may be displayed, and the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 32 (a) may be displayed.

  In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat a series of operations. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32A, in the situation where the base symbol images G6 to G8 are not rotated and displayed, the display state as shown in FIG. The loop display character G4 is displayed so that the motion is repeated while the motion is performed (the display content is also referred to as a display of motion). As the stationary motion, for example, a motion may be considered in which the loop display character G4 moves up and down in a state in which the arm is assembled. On the other hand, in the situation where rotational display is performed in any of the base symbol images G6 to G8, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the display state of moving in a predetermined direction, in the moving unit period The loop display character G4 is displayed so that the motion during movement is performed and the motion during movement is repeated (this display content is also referred to as display during movement). As the motion during movement, for example, a motion in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction can be considered.

  The background G5 for loop display in the loop display effect does not generate a background scroll as shown in FIG. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the background continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is in motion while moving, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the loop display character G4 is displayed as if it is moving in a predetermined direction. Accordingly, the background G5 for loop display is displayed such that the background image is scrolled in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. In this case, the loop display background G5 is displayed such that a series of background images scrolls over the background movement unit period, and the series of background images is repeatedly scrolled each time the background movement unit period elapses. It will be displayed as

  The flow of loop display effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33 (a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 33 (b) shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the movement operation is being performed, and FIG. 33 (c) Shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the operation is being performed, and FIG. 33 (d) shows the flow of scroll display of the background G5 for loop display.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the game play is started, and the variable display of the symbols G1 to G3 is started. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. 33 (c), the loop display character G4 starts an operation during movement from a state during an operation during suspension and As shown in 33 (d), scroll display is also started on the loop display background G5.

  Thereafter, the motion during movement is repeated in the loop display character G4 and the scroll display of a series of background images on the loop display background G5 is repeated until the timing of t6, which is the timing when the current game run ends. In detail, the loop display character G4 executes 1 movement operation during movement during the unit period Tc1 during movement of the timing t1 to t2, the timing t2 to the timing t3, and the timing t3 to t4. Is done. In this case, the next one execution cycle of the movement operation is started at the timing t2 at which one execution cycle of the movement operation ends, and the next cycle of the movement operation at the timing t3 when one execution cycle of the movement operation ends One execution cycle is started, and the next one execution cycle of the traveling operation is started at the timing of t4 at which one execution cycle of the traveling operation is finished. Also, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution cycle of the movement operation is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution cycle of the movement movement The display modes of G4 are the same.

  The loop display background G5 is subjected to one execution of scroll display of a series of background images in the background movement unit period Tc2 of the timing t1 to the timing t5. In this case, the next one execution cycle of the scroll display is started at the timing of t5 when one execution cycle of the scroll display of the series of background images ends. Moreover, while the display modes of the background G5 for loop displays in the start timing of each execution time of the said scroll display are the same, respectively, the background for loop displays in the timing in which the same time passed from the start timing of the execution time of the said scroll display The display modes of G5 are the same.

  In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution cycle of the movement operation in the loop display character G4 and one execution cycle of the scroll display of a series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started simultaneously, the end timing of each execution cycle is It will be different. Further, the number of times that one execution of the movement operation is performed in one game time may be different from the number of times of one execution of scroll display of a series of background images in one game time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), at the timing of t6, the end timing of the game is reached, and as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c), the loop display character G4 is moving. The operating state is switched from the operating state to the stationary state, and as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed from the state in which a series of background images are scrolled. Can be switched to the In this case, although the timing of t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution of the motion during movement in the loop display character G4, the motion during movement is ended at the timing in the middle and the motion during suspension is started. In addition, the timing of t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution cycle in the scroll display of a series of background images in the background G5 for loop display, and the stop display of the background G5 for loop display is displayed in the state displayed at the timing of that t6. It is started.

  The operation for suspension is started in the loop display character G4 at the timing of t6, and the operation for suspension is repeated in the loop display character G4 until the timing of t10 which is the timing at which the next game play is started. In detail, the loop display character G4 performs one execution operation of the stationary operation in the stationary unit period Tc3 of the timing t6 to the timing t7, the timing t7 to the timing t8, and the timing t8 to the timing t9. Is done. In this case, the next one execution cycle of the stationary operation is started at the timing of t7 at which one execution cycle of the stationary operation ends, and the next of the stationary operation at the timing of t8 when one execution cycle of the stationary operation ends One execution cycle is started, and the next one execution cycle of the stationary cycle is started at the timing of t9 when the one stationary cycle is completed. Also, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution cycle of the stationary motion is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution cycle of the stationary motion. The display modes of G4 are the same. The stationary unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, when compared in the same execution period, the number of one execution of the stationary operation is larger than the number of one execution of the moving operation.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the game play is newly started as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the timing t10 is a timing in which the loop display character G4 is in the middle of one execution of the stationary motion, but the loop display character G4 performs the stationary motion. The movement operation is started from the middle state. Then, the loop display character G4 repeatedly executes the on-the-fly operation as in the case of the timing t1 to the timing t6.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), when the previous game run is finished at the timing of t6, the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed with the contents of the background image at that time, and the stopped display is performed. Continues until the timing of t10. Therefore, the scroll display of a series of background images is resumed from the stop display state at the timing of t10 when a new game play is started. That is, the scroll display of the series of background images is temporarily stopped from the timing t6 to the timing t10, and the scroll display of the series of background images is performed in the state where the flow up to the timing t6 is taken over at the timing t10. It will be resumed.

  As described above, when the scroll display effect is executed, both the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and the loop display character G4 and the loop display loop are performed while the game is being executed. Although a series of display over a predetermined period is repeated in both of the display background G5, the loop display character G4 repeats the suspended operation in a situation where the game play is not executed, whereas the background for the loop display In G5, the scroll display of the series of background images is stopped and displayed. In this case, if the table for display control of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 is set as the same table, a table in non-game time is prepared and also in the non-game time. It is necessary to prepare a table for several minutes corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the background G5 for loop display, or it is necessary to fix the timing for stopping and displayed in the background G5 for loop display. If it is attempted to prepare a few non-playing tables for a few minutes corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, the number of tables increases and the storage capacity of the memory module 74 is compressed. If it is attempted to fix the timing at which stop display is performed in the display background G5, the display mode of the loop display background G5 in the non-game session will be uniform regardless of the timing at which the game session ends.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a table for display control of the loop display character G4 and a table for display control of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared. Hereinafter, the contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 74 to execute loop display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, an image data group 121 for loop display is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as data for effecting loop display. The image data group 121 for loop display includes image data for displaying base symbol images G6 to G8, image data for displaying symbols G1 to G3 in base symbol images G6 to G8, and a character G4 for loop display. The image data for displaying and the image data for displaying the background G5 for loop display are included. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes a plurality of types of image data used when performing the stationary operation and a plurality of types of images used when performing the moving operation. It contains data and In addition, a plurality of types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5 are also present.

  In the memory module 74, in addition to the image data group 121 for loop display, a character holding table 122, a character moving table 123, and a background table 124 are stored in advance. The character retention table 122 is a table that is referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the suspended motion. The character moving table 123 is a table to be referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the moving operation. The background table 124 is a table which is referred to in order to scroll a series of background images in a situation where the loop display character G4 is performing an operation during movement.

  FIG. 35 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the character stopping table 122, FIG. 35 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the character moving table 123, and FIG. 35 (c) is for background. It is an explanatory view for explaining a table 124. As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C, pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame is set in each of the tables 122 to 124, and is made to correspond to each pointer information. Information on task content is set. In the information of task contents, information for specifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame is set, and the arrangement position of the image data set as the display object (that is, the frame buffer Parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the drawing position in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be written in 82 and scale information indicating the size of the image data set as the display object is set.

  In detail, with respect to each table, in the character retention table 122, pointer information ("0" to "99") for the number of frames corresponding to the retention unit period Tc3 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information is the image data of the loop display character G4 for performing display at one timing of the stationary operation of the loop display character G4 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When it becomes the drawing timing of the image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the reference object for the pointer information which is the reference object at the previous drawing timing, and the loop according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information The execution of the display control of the display character G4 causes the loop display character G4 to perform a pause operation. In addition, when display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character suspension table 122 is completed in a period in which the loop display character G4 performs an operation during suspension, the pointer information to be referred is the first of the character suspension table 122 It will return to the pointer information of. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly execute the on-hold operation by using the character-on-hold table 122 in which data of display control corresponding to one execution cycle of the on-hold operation is set.

  In the character moving table 123, pointer information ("0" to "199") for the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The contents of the task corresponding to each pointer information include the image data of the loop display character G4 for performing display at one timing of the moving operation of the loop display character G4 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When it becomes the drawing timing of the image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the reference object for the pointer information which is the reference object at the previous drawing timing, and the loop according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information By executing display control of the display character G4, an operation is performed while the loop display character G4 is moving. In addition, when display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character movement table 123 is completed during a period in which the loop display character G4 is caused to perform the movement operation, the pointer information to be referred is the first of the character movement table 123 It will return to the pointer information of. As a result, it becomes possible to repeatedly execute the on-the-fly operation by using the character moving table 123 in which data of display control corresponding to one execution cycle of the on-the-fly operation is set.

  In the background table 124, pointer information ("0" to "599") for the number of frames corresponding to the background movement unit period Tc2 is set. In the contents of the task corresponding to each pointer information, the type of image data of the loop display background G5 for performing display at one timing of scroll display on the loop display background G5 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information And parameter information to be applied to the image data is set. When it becomes the drawing timing of the image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the reference object for the pointer information which is the reference object at the previous drawing timing, and the loop according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information By executing display control of the display background G5, scroll display of a series of background images is performed on the loop display background G5. In addition, when display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the background table 124 is completed in a period in which the scroll display is performed on the loop display background G5, pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer of the background table 124 It will return to the information. As a result, the scroll display can be repeatedly performed using the background table 124 in which data of display control corresponding to one execution of the scroll display is set.

  In the configuration in which the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G 4 and the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G 5 are separately provided, In order to synchronize the start and the stop of the scroll display of the background G5 for loop display, and to synchronize the start of the movement during movement of the character G4 for loop display and the start of the scroll display of the background G5 for loop display, as shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 6, the work RAM 73 is provided with an interlocking flag 125. The state in which the interlocking flag 125 is set to “1” corresponds to the situation in which the loop display character G4 is performing an operation during movement, and the interlocking flag 125 is set to “1”. The scroll display of the background G5 for loop display is performed. On the other hand, when the interlocking flag is "0", the loop display character G4 corresponds to the situation in which the in-parking operation is being performed, and the interlocking flag 125 is "0". The scroll display of the background G5 is stopped.

  As described above, since the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, the game round is ended. When the timing is reached, the background information for loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed by stopping the update of pointer information for the background table 124, while the pointer information of the character retention table 122 is updated and the loop display character G4 By performing the display control of the above, it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the display during suspension. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing when the game play ends. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of tables in non-game time corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is suppressed, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the

  Note that there are four or more types of timing at which the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game play ends.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing a loop display effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing operation processing for a character loop executed by the display CPU 72. In the situation where the loop display effect is to be executed, the operation processing for the character loop is executed in the effect operation processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19).

  When it is specified that it is the start timing of game times based on the execution target table currently read out (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as a use target table. (Step S1102). Thereafter, "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1103), and further, pointer information of a reference target in the character movement table 123 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character moving table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used at this time is derived by using the information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character movement table 123. To grasp.

  If it is determined that it is the end timing of the game run based on the currently-read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character retention table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as a use target table. (Step S1106). Thereafter, the interlock flag 125 in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1107), and further, pointer information to be referred to in the character suspension table 122 is cleared to "0" (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character suspension table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. Also, in step S1113, the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped using the information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information of the character suspension table 122. Do.

  If the current time is neither the start timing nor the end timing of the game run (step S1101 and step S1105: NO), the pointer information is updated for the table to be used among the character movement table 123 and the character retention table 122 ( Step S1109). Specifically, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. Then, if the pointer information after the update exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the table to be used (step S1110: YES), the pointer information is cleared to “0” in order to return to the initial value (step S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used is used as the image data to be used this time. To grasp. In step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time using the information set in the task contents corresponding to the current pointer information of the tables 122 and 123 to be used Derive and understand.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the background loop that is executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the operation processing for the background loop is executed in the operation processing for background in step S703 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where loop display effect should be performed.

  If "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1201: YES), pointer information to be referred to in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. Then, if the pointer information after the update exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), the pointer information is cleared to “0” to return to the initial value (step S1204). Thereafter, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Also, the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped using the information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the background table 124 (step S1206) .

  When "1" is not set in the interlocking flag (step S1201: NO), the image data of the background G5 for loop display set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information of the background table 124 is used this time The image data of the loop display background G5 similar to the previous one is grasped as the image data of the current usage target (step S1207). Further, the same as in the previous time, the parameter information set in the area for storing the parameter information to be applied to the image data in the work RAM 73 is grasped as it is as the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time. The parameter information of the loop display background G5 is grasped as parameter information to be used this time (step S1208).

  When the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop are executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes steps S1112 and S1205 or The image data grasped in step S1207 is set as a drawing target. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

  As described above, since the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, the game round is ended. When the timing is reached, the background information for loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed by stopping the update of pointer information for the background table 124, while the pointer information of the character retention table 122 is updated and the loop display character G4 By performing the display control of the above, it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the display during suspension. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing when the game play ends. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of tables in non-game time corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect is suppressed, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the

  Specialized pointer information is set in the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G4, and special pointer information is set in the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5. With this configuration, it is possible to continue updating the other pointer information or hold the other pointer information in predetermined information while preventing one of the tables 122, 123, 124 from being used. Become.

  As a table for performing display control of the loop display character G4, a character retention table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a display while stopping, and a table for causing the loop display character G4 to perform a display during movement A character moving table 123 is provided separately. Thus, when switching the variable display mode of the loop display character G4, it is sufficient to switch the tables 122 and 123 to be used, and it is possible to preferably switch these variable display modes. In addition, it is possible to set an arbitrary timing as the switching timing while suppressing the number of tables.

  While making the loop display character G4 repeat displaying while being held by repeatedly looping and using the character stopping table 122, and moving to the loop display character G4 by using the character moving table 123 repeatedly looping and using Repeat the display. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the tables 122 and 123.

  By repeatedly using the background table 124 in a loop, the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is repeated. In this case, the number of image update timings required for the loop display background G5 to make one rotation is different from the number of image update timings required for the display of the loop display character G4 to make one rotation. In the configuration, a character moving table 123 for displaying the moving character in loop display G4 and a background table 124 for scrolling the background G5 in loop display are separately provided. As a result, it is possible to set only the information corresponding to one rotation in each of the tables 123 and 124, and it is not necessary to set useless information exceeding one rotation.

  When the character moving table 123 is used and the moving display is started in the loop display character G 4, “1” is set to the interlocking flag 125, whereby the loop display background G 5 using the background table 124 Scroll display of the loop display character G4 is ended and the interlock flag 125 is cleared to “0” when ending the moving display of the loop display character G4 so that the scroll display of the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is started. Is finished. Thus, in the execution target table for controlling the overall flow of the loop display effect, it is only necessary to set the information on the start timing and the end timing of the display during movement of the character G4 for loop display. It is not necessary to set information on the start timing and the end timing of the scroll display for the background G5. Therefore, it is possible to interlock the movements of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 while suppressing the amount of data preset in the data table.

<Another form of loop display effect>
The relative position of the building image to the loop display character G4 is not changed in the loop display background G5 when the loop display character G4 is in the stationary state, but the condition of the light of the building image hits the sky The display aspect such as the color of the image and the presence / absence of the cloud image of the sky and the display position may be changed. In this case, even if the scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, the display mode of the loop display background G5 is changed, so the display control of the loop display background G5 in the situation is performed. It is preferable that a separate table be provided.

  The scroll display of the background G5 for loop display may be continued regardless of whether or not the display in progress is being performed on the character G4 for loop display. Even in this case, by making the table different for the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5, it is possible to prepare a table corresponding to the operation for one rotation of the individual images G4 and G5. Thus, it is not necessary to set useless information exceeding one lap. This is the same even in the case where the display for the loop display character G4 is continued while moving, and the background for the loop display G5 is continued for the scroll display.

  The type of the loop display background G5 may be changed in a situation where the loop display character G4 continues to display while moving. Even in this configuration, by separately providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5, the loop is performed when switching the loop display background G5. It is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the display background G5, and it is possible to use the table for controlling the loop display character G4 as it is.

  The interlock flag 125 is not provided, and in the execution target table for controlling the whole of the loop display effect, together with the information on the switching timing between the display during suspension and the display during movement in the loop display character G4, Information of start timing and stop timing of scroll display in the background G5 for loop display may be set.

<Configuration for performing group display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing group display effect will be described.

  Fig.38 (a) and FIG.38 (b) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating the content of group display production. The group display effect is an effect that is displayed such that a large number of group display characters G11 move as a group in the group display direction. The group display character G11 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player that a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both feet is expressed. Further, each group display character G11 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being the same or similar character although the operation content such as the hand and foot is different. Then, the group display characters G11 are displayed so as to cross the symbol display device 41 as a group in one direction over a group display period (for example, 3 seconds). When the case of FIG. 38 (a) and the case of FIG. 38 (b) are compared, the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. 38 (a) is generally left in FIG. 38 (b). Misaligned in the direction. In addition, each group display character G11 is displayed in the form of a mode in which the player recognizes that the group display character G11 moves in the moving direction as a group.

  The movement direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction, and some of the group display characters G11 are directed from the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 to the center. The remaining group display character G11 may be displayed so as to move from the end opposite to the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 to the center.

  Moving image data 131 for group display is used as image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect. The moving image data is image data which has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to still image data of one frame, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data of a plurality of frames.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in the moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data is I frame data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data And.

  The I picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one or more frames prior to decoding. . B picture data is bi-directionally predicted by referring to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames before and I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames after decoding. , One frame worth of still image data can be created.

  In compressed data in moving image data 131 for group display, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the mth frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) -th frame,..., N-1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  By executing decoding processing on moving image data 131 for group display, still image data (hereinafter also referred to as decoded image data) for a plurality of update timings is generated from the moving image data 131 for the group display. The Rukoto. In this case, the moving image data 131 for group display has a relationship with the compression rate of the image data, and the cycle in which the decoded image data can be used is longer than the update cycle of the image in the symbol display device 41.

  The relationship between the update cycle of the image and the cycle in which the still image data can be used will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40 (a1) shows the update timing of the image in the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 40 (a2) shows the usable timing of the image data stored in advance in the memory module 74 as still image data, FIG. 40 (a3) Shows the usable timing of the decoded image data by the moving image data 131 for group display.

  The image update cycle Td1 in the symbol display device 41 is 20 msec as already described, and as shown in FIG. 40 (a1), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t4, the timing of t5 , T6 timing and t7 timing respectively, the image in the symbol display device 41 is updated. Further, since image data stored in advance in the memory module 74 as still image data can be used as it is, as shown in FIG. 40 (a2), at each of the timing t1 to the timing t7. It is usable.

  On the other hand, the usable period Td2 of the decoded image data by the moving image data 131 for group display is twice the image update period Td1 in the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 40 (a3). Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at the timings t1, t3, t5 and t7, the new decoded image data is used at the timing t2, the timing t4 and the timing t6. It can not be used.

  In this case, in each of the timing t2, the timing t4, and the timing t6, the same decoded image data as the decoded image data used in each of the timing t1, the timing t3, and the timing t5 which is the immediately preceding timing. It is also possible to use However, if it is attempted to simply use the same decoded image data, rattling of the image may occur, and smooth moving image display can not be performed. On the other hand, at two consecutive update timings where the same decoded image data is to be used, the drawing ranges of the same decoded image data in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b are made different. The occurrence of rattling in the image is reduced.

  FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same decoded image data 132 are made different.

  When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, data is written to all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a or 82b is 800 × 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, each decoded image data 132 obtained by performing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display is larger in the size of the initial magnification after the decoding process than the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b. It is the number of pixels. Then, the range which can be rendered by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. Thereby, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b in accordance with the movement direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings, the symbol display device 41 The group display character G11 can be displayed on the whole.

  The present invention is not limited to this, and the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group among the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the drawable range by the decoded image data 132 is the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. Although it is set wider than that, the direction different from the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group among the horizontal direction and the vertical direction has the same dimension or a short dimension as the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. It may be a certain configuration.

  At the front update timing of two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display characters G11 move as a group in the decoded image data 132 as shown in FIG. 40 (b) The drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b is set by moving to the end on the front side of the direction, that is, the end on the left side. On the other hand, at the update timing on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 40C, in the decoded image data 132, the group display character G11 moves closer to the original end in the moving direction as a group, that is, the right end. Thus, the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is set. That is, at the update timing on the rear side with respect to the update timing on the front side, the drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 is opposite to the moving direction of the group display character G11 as a group. Moving. As a result, the group display character G11 displayed at the predetermined position at the front update timing is displayed at a position moved to the left of the predetermined position at the rear update timing. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the group display character G11 moves in a group movement direction between the two update timings. It becomes possible to perform such display. A range out of the drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 is excluded from the drawing objects.

  Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is predetermined. It is the amount of movement. On the other hand, with respect to the group display character G11 at the rear update timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the front update timing in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next use timing is also the predetermined movement amount. It is the same.

  That is, the first decoded image data 132 at one usage timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next usage timing are displayed twice using the decoded image data 132 at one usage timing. Between the amount of movement of the group display character G11 and the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132. The movement amount of the group display character G11 is set to be the same as the predetermined movement amount. More specifically, when the first decoded image data 132 is used and the second decoded image data 132 is used, the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 to be displayed is compared with each other: A predetermined group display character at the front update timing when the second decoded image data 132 is used from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used The amount of movement to the display position of G11 is from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the update timing on the front side when the first decoded image data 132 is used, after the case where the first decoded image data 132 is used Display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the update timing on the side It is twice the amount of movement of up to. In addition, at least group display characters G11 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the drawable range by the respective decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification move as a group so as to enable setting of such movement amounts. The dimension of the direction (specifically, the dimension in the lateral direction) is set to be larger by at least the predetermined moving amount than the dimension in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. With such a configuration, the movement amount of the group display character G11 can be made constant between one update timing and the next update timing, and the group display character G11 can be smoothly moved. It becomes.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for group display effect performed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation processing for group display effect is performed in the calculation processing for effect in step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the group display effect should be executed.

  When it is the timing to execute the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display (step S1301: YES), the address of the moving image data 131 for group display in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302) The address of the work RAM 73 for developing the moving image data 131 for display as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and the decode specification information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1304). Further, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to “0” (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag for specifying in the display CPU 72 whether or not to use the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing at one update timing, and the value of the same use flag is “0”. In some cases, use of the new decoded image data 132 is specified, and when the value of the same use flag is “1”, use of the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing is specified. .

  When the processing of steps S1302 to S1305 is executed, information on the address of moving image data 131 for group display is set in the drawing list transmitted to VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). At the same time, information on the address of the expansion destination of the moving image data 131 for group display is set, and further, decoding specification information is set. When the drawing list is received, the moving picture decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. More specifically, while grasping the address of the moving image data 131 for group display from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), moving image data for group display from the information specified in the drawing list The address of the area developed as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1402). Then, the moving image data 131 for group display is read out from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the moving image data 131 for group display is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 as a result of the decoding is written in each area of the address found in step S1402 (step S1403).

  Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for group display effect (FIG. 41), if the negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the processing of step S1305 is executed, is the value of the same use flag of work RAM 73 "0" It is determined whether or not it is (step S1306). If the value of the same use flag is “0” (step S1306: YES), this means that the update timing for using the new decoded image data 132 is reached. In this case, first, the address of the work RAM 73 where the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the current use order among the plurality of decoded image data 132 already decoded is grasped (step S1307).

  Thereafter, “A, A” coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining at which position the central pixel in the image data to be used is arranged with respect to the frame regions 82 a and 82 b to be drawn. Then, in the case of the “A, B” coordinates, the set position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame areas 82a, 82b is the position shown in FIG. 40B, and the frame areas 82a, 82b are at the left position in the decoded image data 132. The drawing range of is set. The value of A and the value of B are the same regardless of the type of decoded image data 132. Thereafter, after updating and grasping parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1309), "1" is set to the same use flag of the work RAM 73 (step S1310). As a result, at the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as the current update timing is used.

  If “1” is set in the same use flag (step S1306: NO), this means that it is the update timing for using the decoded image data 132 that is the same as the previous update timing. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 where the same decoded image data 132 as the previous one is expanded is grasped (step S1311).

  Thereafter, "A-1, B" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1312). When the coordinates are "A-1, B", the set position of the decoded image data 132 with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b is the position shown in FIG. 40C, and the frame areas 82a and 82b are located on the right in the decoded image data 132. The drawing range of is set. Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the identical use flag of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1314). Thus, new decoded image data 132 is to be used at the next update timing.

  When the process of step S1307 to step S1310 or step S1311 to step S1314 is executed, the decoded list to be used at this time is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Is set, and parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 including coordinate information is set. When the drawing list is received, the VDP 76 executes a setting process for group display as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S804 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). FIG. 42 (b) is a flowchart showing setting processing for group display.

  In the group display setting process, first, the information of the address at which the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list (step S1501). Further, while grasping from the drawing list coordinate information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used at this time (step S1502), grasp other parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 from the drawing list (step S1503) ).

  As described above, the group display setting process is performed, and in the subsequent writing process (step S805), the current decoding is performed with the parameters applied to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Image data 132 is drawn. In this case, if the coordinate information is "A, B", the range shown in FIG. 40 (b) is drawn, and if the coordinate information is "A-1, B", the range shown in FIG. 40 (c) is drawn. Ru. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data, whereby a group display effect is performed.

  As described above, even if the cycle in which the decoded image data 132 based on the moving image data 131 for group display can be used is twice the image update cycle in the symbol display device 41, the same decoded image data 132 In two consecutive update timings in which the image data is to be used, the range of drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the same decoded image data 132 is different. This makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of rattling of the image.

  At two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is to be used, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the front update timing and the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the rear update timing are one. Department is duplicated. This makes it possible to generate a slight image change between two consecutive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132.

  In the group display image at the update timing on the rear side with respect to the image for group display at the update timing on the front side at the two consecutive update timings that use the same decoded image data 132, each group display character G11 In the same decoded image data 132, the range of drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn is changed so that the position is shifted to the front side in the moving direction. Thereby, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to give continuity to the movement of the group display character G11.

  The direction in which at least the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the drawable range by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification is set wider than that in the frame areas 82a and 82b. ing. Thereby, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b in accordance with the movement direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings, the symbol display device 41 The group display character G11 can be displayed on the whole.

  The first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are between two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Group display between the movement amount of the group display character G11, the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132, and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132 The movement amount of the character G11 is set to be the same. Thus, the movement amount of the group display character G11 can be made constant between one update timing and the next update timing, and the group display character G11 can be smoothly moved.

  An image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which a large number of group display characters G11 move in the same direction. This makes it less noticeable that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings.

<Another form of group display effect>
The dimension (specifically, the dimension in the lateral direction) in which at least the group display character G11 moves as a group among the lateral direction and the longitudinal direction within the drawable range by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification is The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which at least the predetermined movement amount is set larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b, and the decoded image data 132 after decoding is enlarged from the size of the initial magnification. Thus, at least the dimension in the specific direction may be set to be larger by at least the predetermined moving amount than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b. In this case, although it is necessary to execute size enlargement processing on the decoded image data 132, the display position of the group display character G11 is moved by a predetermined distance between two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132. It is possible to change the amount.

  The movement direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the dimension in the vertical direction in the drawable range by the decoded image data 132 after the size of the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification or the size of the initial magnification is the dimension in the vertical direction It needs to be set larger by at least a predetermined moving amount than that.

  The group display character G11 is not limited to a human being, and may be another animal such as a cat, a fish and a dog, for example, or may be a pictorial representation of something other than an animal.

  -The same group display character G11 has the same configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b is different at each update timing. The present invention may be applied to an image other than an image moving entirely in the direction. For example, the above configuration may be applied when moving image display is performed such that a large single image exceeding the size of the liquid crystal display unit 41 a of the symbol display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

  Decoding obtained by decoding the moving image data 131 using a configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing range to the frame areas 82a and 82b is different at each update timing The present invention may be applied to image data other than the image data 132. For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

<Configuration for performing effective period display effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the effective period display effect will be described.

  FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the effective period display effect. The effective period display effect is an operation-responsive effect that changes the contents of the effect depending on whether the effect operating device 48 is operated or not during the effective period in which the operation of the effect operating device 48 is activated. When performed, it is an effect of displaying the effective period on the symbol display device 41.

  In the effective period display effect, an operation promotion image G21 for making it possible for the player to recognize that the symbol display device 41 should operate the effect operating device 48 is displayed and the effect operating device 48. An effective period image G22 is displayed to make it possible for the player to recognize the remaining period in which the user's operation is effective. Specifically, an image representing the operation device for effect 48 is displayed as the operation promotion image G21, and an image such that it is recognized that the operation device 48 for effect is operated is displayed. The specific display contents are optional as long as the player can recognize that the device 48 should be operated.

  As the valid period image G22, a frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the effective period image G22, and is displayed in the shape of a horizontally long square frame. The band image G24 is displayed in the frame portion of the frame image G23 so as to extend rightward with the left end of the frame portion as the base end, and as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the effective period display effect starts In this case, the entire frame portion of the frame image G23 is displayed so as to fill the whole, and as the remaining effective period decreases, the tip end position which is the right end position as shown in FIG. It gradually moves toward the left end and is displayed so as to narrow the range embedded in the frame by the frame image G23. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the leading end position of the band image G24, and displayed so as to move according to the leading end position when the leading end position of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. Further, the blinking image G25 is displayed as if the whole is blinking.

  Here, in the case where the blinking display is performed while moving the blinking image G25 in accordance with the movement of the band image G24, data for controlling display of the movement of the band image G24 and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 are controlled. If you try to change either the moving speed of the tip of the band image G24 or the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, the other is also changed in conjunction with it. It will The case where the event occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 44 (a) shows how the moving speed of the tip portion in the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44 (b) shows how the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 changes.

  As the effective period display effect is started, movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 44 (a) at the timing of t1, and blinking as shown in FIG. 44 (b) The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. The moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed over the timing t1 to the timing t5.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 44A, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed which is higher than the first speed. The change of the speed is performed by performing display control with reference to data in a predetermined order among reference data set in time series in data for display control of the movement of the band image G24 and thereafter data in a specific order To reduce the time required to perform display control. Specifically, when data for controlling display is set, the pointer information set by the serial number and the information of the contents of the task are set to correspond to the pointer information on a one-to-one basis. Information of task contents corresponding to pointer information of a specific order which is an order later than the predetermined order after performing display control of the band image G24 with reference to information of task contents corresponding to the pointer information of order The moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed by changing the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image generated until the display control of the band image G24 is performed with reference to FIG. In this case, if the data for display control of the band image G24 and the data for display control of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in the data for display control, movement of the leading end of the band image G24 In order to change the speed, display control is performed with reference to information of task contents corresponding to pointer information in a predetermined order, and then task control is performed for task information corresponding to pointer information in a specific order that is an order later than the predetermined order. If the number of occurrences of the image update timing that occurs before display control is performed with reference to the content information is changed, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 will be changed accordingly.

  That is, when the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at the timing of t5 in FIG. 44 (a), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 as shown in FIG. Also, the first blink cycle Te1 is changed to the second blink cycle Te2. This is the same as when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and when the data for each display control is set collectively, changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 results in Movement speed will also be changed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, data for display control of the display content of the band image G24 and data for display control of the display content of the blinking image G25 are not collectively provided. It is provided individually. Hereinafter, contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 74 to execute the effective period display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the memory module 74 has data for displaying a frame image G23 and data for displaying a band image G24 as data for performing a display effect of an effective period. The image data 142, the lighting image data 143 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state, and the light-off image data 144 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting off state are stored in advance. It is possible to display the frame image G23 on the symbol display device 41 by drawing the frame display image data 141 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76.

  The band display image data 142 is set to a size that can fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, and the left end portion of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification, the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23. Then, while gradually reducing the size in the horizontal direction of the band display image data 142 from the initial magnification, the band display image of the size such that the left end portion of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the data 142, an image in which the leading end portion of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end is displayed.

  The lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 are both image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 are the same at the initial magnification. It becomes size and shape. However, the lighting image data 143 displays a flashing image G25 of a relatively bright color, and the image data for turning off 144 displays a flashing image G25 of a relatively dark color. Only one of the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 is used at each update timing of the image, and the image data 143 and 144 to be used is a blinking image G25 at the leading end of the band image G24. Coordinate information on the frame areas 82a and 82b is set so as to be displayed superimposed from the front side. Then, a period in which the lighting image data 143 is to be used and a period in which the light-off image data 144 is to be used are alternately repeated to display the blinking image G25 in the lighting state and the blinking image G25 in the light-off state. The display is alternately repeated. This makes it possible to display the blinking image G25 as if the light were blinking.

  In the memory module 74, in addition to the various image data 141 to 144, a band display table 145 and a blinking display table 146 are stored in advance. The band display table 145 is data for executing display control of the band image G24. Specifically, the size information of the band display image data 142 in the horizontal direction and the position information of the leading end of the band image G24 are determined. Data. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25. Specifically, image data to be used for the blinking image G25 among the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 is determined. Data. The band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the band display table 145. FIG. As shown in FIG. 46A, in the band display table 145, pointer information is set so as to be a sequential number, and the size of the band display image data 142 in the horizontal direction is made to correspond to each pointer information. A combination of the information and the position information of the leading end of the band image G24 is set. Since the size of the band display image data 142 is reduced at the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, the display range in the horizontal direction of the band image G24 is narrowed. Then, the band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b so that the left end portion of the band image G24 overlaps the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23, whereby the leading end portion of the band image G24 is gradually left An image moving toward is displayed. Further, the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to is the tip portion of the band image G24 when the band display image data 142 is reduced and drawn at the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. It corresponds to the position of. Then, the image data to be used out of the lighting image data 143 and the light-off image data 144 is drawn from the front side to the front end portion of the band image G24 so as to be a position corresponding to the front end position information. Thus, the blinking image G25 is displayed.

  When display control of the band image G24 is performed such that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, one of the image update timings of the band side specific number of times which is a plurality of times (for example, five times) is performed. The same size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information of the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the image update timing of the band side specific number of times, and the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are band side specification Reference is made over the number of image update timings. As described above, the pointer information is updated each time the update timing of the specified number of times on the band side elapses, so that the band image G24 is displayed so that the leading end portion moves at the first speed, and the leading end portion is displayed. A blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  On the other hand, when display control of the band image G24 is performed such that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at a second speed higher than the first speed, the band side predetermined number of times that is less than the band number specified number For example, the same size information and tip position information corresponding to one piece of pointer information are referred to over the two image update timings. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information of the next order at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image of the predetermined number of times on the band side, and the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are predetermined on the band side Reference is made over the number of image update timings. As described above, the pointer information is updated each time the predetermined number of times of image-side update timings elapse, so that the band image G24 is displayed such that the tip portion moves at the second speed higher than the first speed. At the same time, a blinking image G25 is displayed on the front end portion so as to overlap from the front side.

  FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to be a sequential number, and the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 are made to correspond to each pointer information. The image data to be used among them is set. The image data 143 and 144 set to be used in the pointer information to be referred to is the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image. By drawing at the position, the blinking image G25 in a state corresponding to the image data 143 and 144 to be used is displayed superimposed on the front end portion of the band image G24 from the front side.

  In the blinking display table 146, the lighting image data 143 is set as the image data to be used for the pointer information of "0" to "9", and for the pointer information of "10" to "19". In this case, the image data 144 for turning off is set as the image data to be used. When display control using the blinking display table 146 is performed, the pointer information to be referred to is incremented by one each time the pointer information update timing is reached, and the value of the pointer information after the one addition is the maximum value “ When it exceeds 19 ", the value of the pointer information of the reference object is cleared to" 0 ". That is, while the effective period display effect is being performed, the reference cycle in the case where the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 starts from "0" and becomes "19" is one reference cycle. Will be repeated several times. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data of the blinking display table 146.

  When display control of the blink image G25 is performed such that the blink cycle of the blink image G25 becomes the first blink cycle Te1, one image update timing of the blink side specific number of times which is a plurality of times (for example, twice) is performed. The image data 143 and 144 of the same use object corresponding to the pointer information of are referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the image update timing of the blinking side specific number of times, and the same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information. Are referred to over the update timing of the image on the blinking side for a specific number of times. As described above, the pointer information is updated each time the update timing of the specific image on the blinking side elapses, so that the first blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the front end portion of the band image G24 from the front side. The blinking display is performed in the blinking cycle Te1.

  On the other hand, when display control of the blink image G25 is performed such that the blink cycle of the blink image G25 becomes the second blink cycle Te2, the blink side predetermined number of times (for example, one time) is smaller than the specified number of blink sides. The same use object image data 143 and 144 corresponding to one piece of pointer information is referred to over the image update timing. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the image update timing of the predetermined number of times on the blinking side, and the image data 143 and 144 for the same use corresponding to the pointer information. Are referred to over a predetermined number of times of image update timing on the blinking side. As described above, the pointer information is updated each time the image update timing on the predetermined number of times on the blinking side elapses, so that the second blinking image G25 is displayed on the leading end portion of the band image G24 so as to overlap from the front side. The blinking display is performed in the blinking cycle Te2.

  The manner in which the effective period display effect is performed using both the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47 (a1) and 47 (a2) show the movement speed of the leading end of the band image G24, and FIGS. 47 (b1) and 47 (b2) show the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 47A1 and 47B1, the case where the moving speed of the leading end portion in the band image G24 is changed under the situation where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is constant will be described.

  By the effective period display effect being started, movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. The moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed from the timing t11 to the timing t15.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, the number of times of occurrence of the update timing of the image required to update the pointer information in the band display table 145 is changed to the predetermined number on the band side which is smaller than the number on the band side. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (a1), the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to a second speed higher than the first speed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (b1), the number of times of occurrence of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blink display table 146 is maintained at the blink side specified number of times until then. The flashing cycle of the flashing image G25 is maintained at the first flashing cycle Te1.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 47 (a2) and 47 (b2), the case where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed in a situation where the moving speed of the leading end portion in the band image G24 is constant will be described.

  By the effective period display effect being started, movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG. 47 (a2), and blinks as shown in FIG. 47 (b2) The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking cycle Te1 are performed from the timing t21 to the timing t25.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t25, the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to the predetermined number on the blinking side which is smaller than the specific number on the blinking side. Thus, as shown in FIG. 47 (b2), the blink cycle of the blink image G25 is changed to a second blink cycle Te2 shorter than the first blink cycle Te1. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (a 2), the number of times of occurrence of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is maintained to the band side specific number of times until then. The moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed.

  As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display control of the display contents of the band image G24 and the blink display table 146 is provided as data for display control of the display contents of the blink image G25. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the other while not changing one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. As a result, it becomes possible to independently change each of the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it becomes possible to preferably realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect .

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation that the special response for operation is executed when the operation device for effect 48 is operated in the effective period. It is done. Specifically, the first display content is the case where the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end, The second display content and the band image G24 in the case where the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed halfway and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end The second display content is a third display content in the case where the moving speed of the leading end portion is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 halfway through the process. The degree of expectation is higher than that of the first display content, and the degree of expectation of the third display content is higher than that of the second display content. As a result, by confirming the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25, it becomes possible to grasp the degree of expectation that the operation corresponding special presentation will be executed when the presentation operation device 48 is operated. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the effective period display effect.

  Further, when the operation support special effect is executed when the operation device for effect 48 is operated, the operation corresponding special effect is not executed when the operation device for effect 48 is operated. The probability of occurrence of the special operation corresponding to the operation is set such that the expectation for achieving a jackpot result in the corresponding game play is higher than in the case. In this case, since the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the execution expectation of the operation-corresponding special effect as described above, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are also associated with the expectation of the jackpot result It will be done. Also from this point, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the effective period display effect.

  In addition, when the operation device for effect 48 is operated during the effective period, any one of a plurality of types of operation corresponding effects including the first operation corresponding effect and the second operation corresponding effect may be executed, and in this case, The display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 may be configured to be associated with an execution expectation degree of a predetermined operation-corresponding effect.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the effective period display effect will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for displaying the effective period, which is executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the calculation process for displaying the effective period is performed in the calculation process for effect for step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the effective period display effect should be performed.

  If it is the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). Then, as the setting process of the moving speed of the band image G24, the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first speed (step S1603) As a process, the update cycle of the pointer information in the blink display table 146 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first blink cycle Te1 (step S1604).

  Thereafter, among the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144, the image data to be used set corresponding to the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is displayed for the blinking image G25 this time. While grasping as image data (step S 1613), the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S 1614). Thereafter, the size information set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S 1615), and the band display table 145 The tip position information set in correspondence with the first pointer information in step 2 is grasped as position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 (step S1616) And further grasp parameter information other than these (step S1617).

  As described above, when the calculation process for displaying the effective period is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S 605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144. Among them, the image data to be used set corresponding to the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing objects. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S1615 to step S1617 is set in the drawing list.

  When it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605). When the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, the number of times of occurrence of the image update timing since the pointer information of the band display table 145 was updated last time is the band side specific number If it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the side of the band image G24, and the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is set to the second speed, the pointer information of the band display table 145 is updated last time. It is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the side of the band image G24 when the number of times of occurrence of the image update timing from the above is the band-side predetermined number. When it is the update timing of the pointer information on the side of the band image G24 (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred in the band display table 145 is incremented by one (step S1606). ).

  If it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607). When the blink cycle of the blink image G25 is set to the first blink cycle Te1, if the number of times of occurrence of the image update timing since the pointer information of the blink display table 146 was updated last time is the blink side specified number When it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set to the second blinking period Te2, the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is updated last time When the number of occurrences of the image update timing is the predetermined number on the blinking side, it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G 25 side. If it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred in the blinking display table 146 is incremented by 1 (step S1608) ).

  If it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 (step S1609). If the movement speed is changed or not, whether or not the change timing is determined at the start of the effective period display effect of this time, whether the display CPU 72 is the timing determined at the start Determine Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image serving as the change timing at the start of the effective period display effect of this time is determined, and the number of occurrences of the update timing of the determined image is obtained. In such a case, it is conceivable to identify the timing of the change. When it is the timing to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), the updating cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the second speed as processing for setting the moving speed of the band image G24. The corresponding update cycle is set (step S1610).

  If it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). When changing the presence or absence of the blinking cycle and the blinking cycle, the change timing is determined at the start of the effective period display effect of this time, and whether the display CPU 72 determines the timing determined at the start Determine Further, as a method of specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the update timing of the image serving as the change timing at the start of the effective period display effect of this time is determined, and the number of occurrences of the update timing of the determined image is obtained. In such a case, it is conceivable to identify the timing of the change. When it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), the updating cycle of pointer information in the blinking display table 146 corresponds to the second blinking cycle Te2 as the setting process of the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. The update period to be set is set (step S1612).

  Thereafter, of the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for light-off 144, the image data for use set corresponding to the pointer information of the current reference object in the blinking display table 146 is displayed the blinking image G25 this time It is grasped as image data to be processed (step S1613). In this case, when the process of step S1608 is not executed in the current process cycle, the image data corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to in the previous process cycle is grasped, and in step S1608 in the current process cycle. When the process is being performed, image data corresponding to the pointer information that is newly updated and referred to this time is grasped. Further, the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S 1614).

  Thereafter, the size information set in correspondence with the current reference target pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S 1615), and the band display is performed. The tip position information set in correspondence with the current reference target pointer information in the table 145 is used as position information for drawing the image data to be used at this time among the lighting image data 143 and the turning-off image data 144 To grasp. In this case, if the process of step S1606 is not executed in the current process cycle, size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to in the previous process cycle are grasped, and the current process cycle is performed. If the process of step S1606 is being executed, size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information newly updated and referred to this time are grasped. In addition, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

  As described above, when the calculation process for displaying the effective period is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S 605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144. Among them, the image data to be used set in correspondence with the current reference target pointer information in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing objects. . Further, the parameter information grasped in step S1615 to step S1617 is set in the drawing list.

  As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display control of the display contents of the band image G24, and the blink display table 146 is provided as data for display control of the display contents of the blink image G25. By doing this, it becomes possible to change the other while not changing one of the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. As a result, it becomes possible to independently change each of the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it becomes possible to preferably realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect .

  In particular, when changing the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24, it is only necessary to change the update period of the pointer information in the band display table 145, so the same band display can be used at any moving speed. Table 145 is used. Similarly, when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, only the updating cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is changed, so the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of which blinking cycle. used. For example, in a configuration in which data for display control of the display content of the band image G24 and data for display control of the display content of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in one table, the front end portion of the band image G24 If one of the moving speed and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is to be changed without affecting the other, it is necessary to separately prepare a corresponding table, and the table is a combination of the moving speed and the blinking cycle. A few minutes of type will be required. Then, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 required to store the table in advance will increase. On the other hand, since the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the moving speed, and the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking cycle, the memory module It is possible to realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect while suppressing the increase of the storage capacity of the memory 74.

  In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to the information of the position for setting the image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 is set. Thus, information for arranging the blinking image G25 at the position of the leading end of the band image G24 is set in association with the information that determines the display mode of the band image G24. Therefore, in the configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are individually provided, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for adjusting the relative position of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25. .

<Another form of effective period display effect>
· The pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is only “0” and “1”, one of the “0” and “1” corresponds to the lighting image data 143, and the other is the lighting image data A configuration corresponding to 144 may be adopted. In this case, the blink cycle of the blink image G25 is set to either the first blink cycle Te1 or the second blink cycle Te2 by adjusting the update cycle of the pointer information between “0” and “1”. It becomes possible. According to this configuration, the data amount of the blinking display table 146 can be further reduced.

  When the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is the first speed, 1 is added to the pointer information of the reference object in the band display table 145 at each update timing of one image, and the leading end of the band image G24 When the moving speed is the second speed, two or more values may be added to the pointer information of the reference object in the band display table 145 at each update timing of the image. That is, the value to be added to the reference target pointer information in the band display table 145 may be different between the first speed and the second speed at each update timing of an image. Even in this configuration, it is possible to change the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed while using the same band display table 145.

  -When the blink cycle of the blink image G25 is the first blink cycle Te1, one is added to the pointer information of the reference object in the blink display table 146 at each update timing of one image, and the blink cycle of the blink image G25 is In the case of the second blink cycle Te2, two or more values may be added to the pointer information to be referred to in the blink display table 146 at each update timing of the image. That is, the value to be added to the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 may be different between the first blink cycle Te1 and the second blink cycle Te2 at each image update timing. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the blink cycle of the blink image G25 between the first blink cycle Te1 and the second blink cycle Te2 while using the same blink display table 146.

  The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and is three or more types. It may be. Further, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

  · Instead of the configuration in which the blinking display table 146 is used to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, processing on the program displays the blinking image G25 without using the table The type of image data used to do this may be determined.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the shape and the color of the band image G24 may change with the passage of time. Further, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the size, the shape, and the color of the blinking image G25 along with the passage of time It is good also as composition which changes.

<Configuration for performing number display effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the number display effect will be described.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the number display effect. The number display effect is an effect that displays the number of game balls acquired by the player from the start of the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter referred to as the acquired number) on the symbol display device 41 in the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode. . The number obtained is the difference between the total number of gaming balls paid out to the player from the start of the opening / closing execution mode and the total number of gaming balls fired into the gaming area PA from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. It is Further, the display of the acquired number by the number display effect is started when the opening period is started in the open / close execution mode, and when the payout trigger of the game ball to the player occurs in the open / close execution mode and the launch of the game ball The display contents are changed in accordance with when the event is performed. Referring to FIG. 49 in detail, in the situation where the display effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed by the symbol display device 41, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the symbol display device 41. By checking the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of gaming balls acquired in the open / close execution mode.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for effecting number display.

  The MPU 52 of the main control unit 50 is electrically connected to the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the launch ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball detection sensor 156. The prize detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of prizes that trigger the payout of gaming balls, and are used for the general prize port 31, the special power prize apparatus 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34. A plurality of types are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives a detection signal from each of the plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151 to 154. Then, when the MPU 52 receives a signal corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entering in the corresponding ball entry unit from any one of the prize detection sensors 151 to 154, the MPU 52 is provided with the number of game balls corresponding to the prize. A prize ball command for instructing a payout is sent to the payout control device 55.

  The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which the MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a is a ROM 159b storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 159a and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data upon execution of the control program stored in the ROM 159b. A RAM 159c, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated. The payout device 56 is electrically connected to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, and when the MPU 159a receives the award ball command from the main control device 50, the MPU 159a drives the payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56. The payout of the game ball is started by starting the output of the signal. Then, when the MPU 159a determines that the number of game balls paid out, which is measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56, corresponds to the number information set in the prize ball command. Then, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 56a is stopped to stop the payout of the game balls. Also, every time the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 detects one gaming ball with the payout detection sensor 56b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout of one gaming ball is completed to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50. Send

  The launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided in the game ball launch mechanism 161 for firing game balls toward the game area PA when the launch operation device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the inner frame 13 showing a lower region of the inner frame 13 in an enlarged manner. The game ball launch mechanism 161 is provided on the front of the inner frame 13 below the game board 24. The game ball firing mechanism 161 is a firing rail 162 extending toward the induction rail formed on the game board 24 and an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied from the upper plate 46 a onto the firing rail 162 toward the induction rail. A solenoid 163 and a holding member 164 for holding one gaming ball B1 supplied on the firing rail 162 at a position where the solenoid 163 can launch it are provided. When the launch operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 each time a predetermined launch cycle (for example, 60 msec) is reached, and the launch of the gaming ball by the solenoid 163 is performed.

  In the game ball firing mechanism 161, the shooting ball detection sensor 155 is provided to detect the game ball passing the position of the most downstream part of the shooting rail 162. In other words, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided to detect the game balls launched toward the guide rail from the most downstream part of the launch rail 162, and the game balls detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 are the launch rails. There is no backflow of 162.

  The shooting ball detection sensor 155 is an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and outputs HI level signals as a shooting ball detection signal in a situation where the gaming ball B1 is in the detection range. In the situation where B1 is not present in the detection range, a low level signal is output as the launch ball non-detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to specify the number of gaming balls that have been fired toward the guide rail by passing the position of the most downstream part of the launch rail 162 by the launch ball detection sensor 155. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. In addition, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be another detection sensor.

  The return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in the return ball collection portion 165 for collecting the game balls which are shot toward the induction rail from the most downstream part of the emission rail 162 but do not reach the game area PA and flow backward the induction rail. It is done. The return ball recovery portion 165 is formed in a region formed by laterally separating the guide rail and the firing rail 162 on the front surface of the inner frame 13 and exists across the rails. The return ball recovery section 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth dimension, and the space is opened upward. The return ball collecting unit 165 is in communication with the lower tray 47a, and the gaming balls B1 collected by the return ball collecting unit 165 are discharged to the lower tray 47a by their own weight.

  In the return ball recovery unit 165, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided to detect a game ball passing through the position of the most downstream portion of the return ball recovery unit 165. That is, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided to detect a game ball flowing downward from the most downstream portion of the return ball recovery unit 165 toward the lower tray 47a.

  The return ball detection sensor 156 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a return ball detection signal in a situation where the game ball is in the detection range. In a situation not in the detection range, a low level signal is output as a return ball non-detection signal. Therefore, the return ball detection sensor 156 can specify the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection unit 165. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. In addition, the return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be another detection sensor.

  Returning to the description referring to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives the delivery completion signal from the MPU 159a of the delivery control device 55, receives the launch ball detection signal from the launch ball detection sensor 155, and returns the ball. The command corresponding to each of the reception results of the return ball detection signal from the detection sensor 156 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62. In detail, the MPU 52 of the main control unit 50 counts the number of times the payout completion signal is received, and the payout of 10 gaming balls is completed when the payout completion signal is received 10 times. Is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62. Further, when the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 does not receive the next payout completion signal even if the reception standby period (for example, 2 sec) has elapsed since the payout completion signal was previously received, the winning ball completion command is transmitted last time After that, even if the number of times the payout completion signal has been received does not reach 10 times, the winning ball completion command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 62. In this award ball completion command, information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the award ball completion command was transmitted last time is set. Further, the MPU 52 of the main control unit 50 transmits to the sound light side MPU 62 a launch execution command indicating that the launch of one game ball has been performed when the launch ball detection signal is received from the launch ball detection sensor 155 When a return ball detection signal is received from the return ball detection sensor 156, a return ball generation command indicating that one return ball is generated is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62.

  When the sound-light side MPU 62 is in the opening / closing execution mode, the sound-light side MPU 62 can display the number of acquired balls every time it receives a prize ball completion command, a firing execution command and a return ball generation command from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50. Perform measurement processing. Then, the measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement process is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 when the transmission timing of the measurement command is reached. The display CPU 72 causes the symbol display device 41 to display the number display image G31 in a state in which the content of the received measurement command is reflected.

  Hereinafter, processing contents executed by the sound light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 in order to perform the number display effect will be described. First, the processing content executed by the sound light side MPU 62 will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the counting process performed by the sound light side MPU 62. The counting process is performed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  When the award ball completion command is received in the open / close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1702: YES), the measurement counter 166 provided in the sound light side RAM 64 is set to the award ball completion command received this time A value corresponding to the completion number of payouts of the game balls being played is added (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter used to measure the number of acquisitions generated from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the open / close execution mode. For example, when a winning ball completion command indicating that payout of ten gaming balls has been completed is received, the value of “10” is added to the measurement counter 166, and payout of three gaming balls is completed. Is received, the value “3” is added to the measurement counter 166.

  When the launch execution command is received in the open / close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1704: YES), “1” is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both a positive value and a negative value. For example, when the value of the measurement counter 166 is “5”, measurement is performed when a launch execution command is received. The value of the counter 166 is “4”, and when the firing execution command is received when the value of the measurement counter 166 is “0”, the value of the measurement counter 166 is “−1”. When the return ball generation command is received in the open / close execution mode (step S1701 and step S1706: YES), “1” is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the output setting process of the measurement command executed by the sound light side MPU 62. The counting process is performed in the command selection process of step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the measurement command output setting process, it is determined first whether it is the measurement command output timing (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command occurs when the command output cycle elapses in the condition of the open / close execution mode. The command output cycle is set as a cycle longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31. More specifically, the update cycle of the number display image G31 is longer than the cycle obtained by doubling the update cycle of the number display image G31. It is set as a cycle shorter than the cycle multiplied by three. The update cycle of the number display image G31 is set to a cycle longer than 20 msec, which is the update cycle of the image for one frame, and is set to, for example, 300 msec. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 generated as the update cycle of the number display image G31 elapses corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

  If it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801: YES), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the number of acquisitions by determining whether the value of the measurement counter 166 is "0" or more. It is determined whether or not it is (step S1802). If the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the acquired number (step S1802: YES), the increase measurement command is read out from the sound light side ROM 63, and the measurement counter is read for the read increase measurement command. Information corresponding to the current value of 166 is set (step S1803). Then, the increase measurement command after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). As a result, the display CPU 72 identifies that the number of acquisitions has increased, and identifies the number of increases.

  If it is the output timing of the measurement command and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than "0" (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the decrease in the number of acquisitions It means that you are doing. In this case, the reduction measurement command is read from the sound light side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set to the read reduction measurement command (step S1805). Then, the reduction measurement command after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, the display CPU 72 identifies that the number of acquisitions has decreased, and identifies the number of decreases.

  When the process of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to "0" (step S1807). As a result, the acquired information on the number of objects to be set to the measurement command is erased from the measurement counter 166.

  Next, the processing content executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing measurement command handling processing executed by the display CPU 72. The measurement command handling process is performed in the command handling process of step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  When the increase measurement command is received from the sound side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73 receives the increase in the number of acquisitions set in the increase measurement command received this time. A value corresponding to the number is added (step S1902). The reflection counter 167 is a counter for specifying, by the display CPU 72, the number of increases and decreases to be reflected on the display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. When the reduction measurement command is received from the sound side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to the number of decreases in the acquired number set in the reduction measurement command received this time. The value is subtracted (step S1904).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for measurement display performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for measurement display is executed in the calculation processing for effect in step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19).

  When it is the update timing of the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the subtraction process of the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is performed. Execute (step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, when the value of the total counter 168 changes, the content of the number display image G31 changes accordingly. In the subtraction process of the total counter 168, the value of the decrease in the number of acquired pieces set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the current value of the total counter 168. That is, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, all of the values for the decrease in the number of acquisitions set in the reflection counter 167 are for summation, regardless of the value. This is reflected in the value of the counter 168. As a result, when a decrease in the number of acquired images occurs, all of the decrease is collectively reflected on the display of the acquired number of images in the number display image G31. After that, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" (step S2004).

  If it is the update timing of the number display image G31 and the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0" or more (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more It is determined (step S2005). If the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0". In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at the current update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the display content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

  If the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (YES in step S2005), it is determined whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or more than a first reference value (step S2006). Here, when the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31 is increased, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquisitions increases, it is possible to make it easy to continue the period for which the display of the number of acquisitions increases so that the display of the number of acquisitions increases, and the number of acquisitions increases in the open / close execution mode. Makes it easy to give the player the impression of

  A plurality of types of values to be acquired addition targets are set at one update timing of the number display image G31, and more specifically, the first addition target value "5" is set as the value to be added. The second addition target value “3” which is smaller than the first addition target value and the third addition target value “1” which is smaller than the second addition target value are set. Then, if the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the value of “12” preset as the first reference value, “5” is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is If the value is larger than the value of "5" preset as the second reference value which is smaller than the first reference value, "3" is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 Is less than the value of "5", "1" is selected as the value to be added. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the value for the increase in the number of acquisitions waiting in the reflection counter 167 becomes an extremely large value without being reflected in the display of the number of acquisitions in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the increase aspect of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

  By the way, when the payout motor 56a is operating at the normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out the game balls at a rate of one in 24 msec. In addition, the firing cycle of the gaming ball is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output period of the measurement command by the sound light side MPU 62 is about 720 msec. Then, a value of "18" is set at the maximum as the value for the increase in the number of acquisitions included in the measurement command for increase, so the situation where the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a value larger than the first reference value is It can occur.

  In detail, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2007). And the first addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the first addition target value, and the value for the increase of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is equal to the first addition target value. Decrease.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the total counter 168 Step S2010) The second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the second addition target value, and the value for the increase of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is equal to the second addition target value. Decrease.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2012), and the third addition target is added from the reflection counter 167. The value is subtracted (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the third addition target value, and the value corresponding to the increase of the acquired number held in the reflection counter 167 is equal to the third addition target value. Decrease.

  When the process of step S2004 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S2005, when the process of step S2008 is performed, when the process of step S2011 is performed, or when the process of step S2013 is performed, a counter for totaling The image data corresponding to the value 168 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). Thus, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), image data for displaying an image corresponding to the value of the current total counter 168 as the number display image G31 is drawn. It is set as a target. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

  Next, how the number display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 56 (a) shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound light side MPU 62, FIG. 56 (b) shows the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56 (c) shows the number display image G31. Indicates the update timing.

  At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 56A, the sound light side MPU 62 transmits a measurement command to the display CPU 72. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “17” is set as an increase in the acquired number. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to "17" at the timing of t1. However, since the timing t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected on the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

  Thereafter, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), the timing for updating the number display image G31 is obtained. In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is “17” which is a value larger than the first reference value, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is the first addition target value. "5" which is is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the value up to that point.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the timing for updating the number display image G31 is obtained at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4. In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value. Therefore, as shown in FIG. [2] “3” which is an addition target value is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the value up to that point.

  Thereafter, at time t5, as shown in FIG. 56A, the sound light side MPU 62 transmits a measurement command to the display CPU 72. In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which “3” is set as a decrease in the acquired number. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is reduced from "6" to "3" at the timing of t5, and updated to "3".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the timing of updating the number display image G31 is obtained at the timing of t6 and the timing of t7. In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than or equal to the second reference value, so as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is subtracted by "1" which is the third addition target value. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 56A, the sound light side MPU 62 transmits a measurement command to the display CPU 72. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “5” is set as an increase in the number of acquired pieces. Therefore, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is incremented by 5 from “1” and updated to “6”.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 56C, the update timing of the number display image G31 is obtained. In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value larger than the second reference value again, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to the second addition target value “3” as shown in FIG. 56 (b). "Is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the value up to that point.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 56C, the timing for updating the number display image G31 is obtained at timing t10, timing t12, and timing t13. In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than or equal to the second reference value, so as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is subtracted by "1" which is the third addition target value. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value. Note that although the measurement command is transmitted as shown in FIG. 56 (a) at the timing of t11, “0” is set to the measurement command as information on the increase and decrease of the acquired number, so the reflection counter The value of 167 has not been changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the timing of updating the number display image G31 is as shown in FIG. 56 (c), but the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0” as shown in FIG. 56 (b). The value of the reflection counter 167 is maintained as it is, and the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is also maintained as it is.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 56A, the sound light side MPU 62 transmits a measurement command to the display CPU 72. In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which “5” is set as a decrease in the number of acquired pieces. Therefore, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is decremented by 5 from "0" and updated to "-5".

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 56C, the timing of updating the number display image G31 is obtained. In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions. If the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquired pieces, the value is reflected on the display of the acquired number at one time regardless of the value. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0".

  As described above, the number of acquired game balls after the start of the opening / closing execution mode as the number display effect is displayed while being varied according to the increase or decrease of the actual number of acquisitions, so that it is in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode Also, the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired up to that point. In this case, when the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31 is increased, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquisitions increases, it is possible to make it easy to continue the period for which the display of the number of acquisitions increases so that the display of the number of acquisitions increases, and the number of acquisitions increases in the open / close execution mode. Makes it easy to give the player the impression of

  A plurality of types of values to be added to the acquired number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. The larger the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31, and the smaller the value of the reflection counter 167, the 1 of the number display image G31. The value to be added to the number of acquisitions at the number of update timings is a small value. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the value for the increase in the number of acquisitions waiting in the reflection counter 167 becomes an extremely large value without being reflected in the display of the number of acquisitions in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the increase aspect of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

  Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than the first reference value and the second addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31, the value of the reflection counter 167 is subsequently set. When the value becomes larger than the first reference value, the situation returns to the situation where the first addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31. This makes it possible to update the display of the acquired number in a manner appropriate to the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquired pieces, the value of the decrease is collectively obtained at one time in the number display image G31 regardless of the value of the reflection counter 167. Reflected on the display of the number. This makes it possible to prevent the period for which the display of the acquired number is updated to be continued so as to be continued for a long time. In addition, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, the value of the reflection counter 167 can be cleared to “0” at one update timing of the number display image G31, and then reflected. It becomes possible to make the value of the counter 167 be a positive value easily. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities for updating so as to increase the display of the acquired number.

<Another form of number display effect>
· When transmitting the winning ball command to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 instead of transmitting the winning ball completion command to the sound light side MPU 62 from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50, the same winning ball command is transmitted It is good also as composition transmitted to side MPU62. In this case, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out is added to the display of the acquired number, although the number is not actually paid out.

  Although the number of game balls shot by the shot ball detection sensor 155 and the number of return balls of the game ball detected by the return ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the display of the number obtained, One or both may not be reflected in the display of the acquired number.

  The number display effect is configured to be started when the opening period is started in the opening / closing execution mode, but instead, it is started when the first round game round is started after the opening period ends. It is good also as composition.

  The number display effect is configured to end when one open / close execution mode ends, but when the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the number display effect in the high frequency support mode If the open / close execution mode occurs a plurality of times without putting the low frequency support mode in between, the number of acquired game balls after the start of the first open / close execution mode is continuously displayed. It may be Moreover, when the big hit occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, the number display effect is continued in the high probability mode, and the open / close execution mode occurs more than once without putting the low probability mode in between. In this case, the number of acquired game balls after the start of the first opening / closing execution mode may be continuously displayed.

  · It is possible to specify whether or not the firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, and the number display image G31 depending on whether or not the firing operation is performed on the firing operation device 28. The value to be added to the acquired number may be changed at one update timing of. For example, even if the value for which the acquired number is to be added is the same, updating of the number display image G31 is more likely in the situation where the firing operation is performed than in the situation where the firing operation is not performed A configuration may be adopted in which the value to be added to the acquired number at the timing is likely to be a large value or a large value, or may be a configuration having a small value or a small value. A touch sensor that detects that the player is touching the firing operation device 28 can be specified as a configuration that enables identification as to whether or not the firing operation device 28 is performing a shooting operation. If the touch sensor is turned on, a configuration may be made to specify that the firing operation is being performed, and in addition to or instead of the configuration, the amount of rotational operation of the firing operation device 28 A configuration is provided in which a variable resistor for grasping is provided and the situation where the firing operation is performed when the detection result of the variable resistor corresponds to the result that the rotation operation amount is a predetermined amount or more It may be

<Another form of number display effect>
The target to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the number of acquired game balls in the open / close execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in the case where the number of continued games in the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player such as an RT game, AT game or ART game in the slot machine can increase in the middle of the advantageous gaming state, the remaining continuation as a number display effect An increase display effect may be executed to indicate how the number of games increases. The calculation processing for the increase display performed by the display CPU 72 to perform the increase display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  When an opportunity to increase the number of continued games in the advantageous gaming state occurs, an increase display effect is started. If it is the start timing of the increase display effect (step S2101: YES), a division process of the target increase value is executed (step S2102). In the division process of the target increase value, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the number of continuing games in the advantageous gaming state is divided by "100" which is a predetermined division value. When multiple types of target increase values are set, and the value of the quotient when divided by a division value is set to 8 or less for all of the target increase values of the plurality of types, and when they are divided by a division value The quotient values of are set to be different from each other. Specifically, “50”, “100” and “250” are set as target increase values. When the target increase value is “50”, the result of dividing by the division value is “0” and the remainder is “50”. When the target increase value is “100”, the division is performed by the division value. As a result, when the quotient is “1” and the remainder is “0”, and the target increase value is “250”, the result of division by the division value is quotient “2” and the remainder is “50”.

  When the division process of the target increase value is executed, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the quotient derived by the division process is stored as a unit increase value in the work RAM 73 (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value for increasing the display of the remaining number of continued games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an increase display effect at one update timing of the display. As described above, since the quotient of the result of division by the division value differs according to the type of the target increase value, the unit increase value also differs according to the type of the target increase value.

  Thereafter, setting processing of the unit increment counter provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for specifying, with the display CPU 72, the number of times the display by the increase display effect is updated in the current increase display effect. In step S2104, the current target increase value is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division is set in the unit increase counter. For example, when the target increase value is "250", the unit increase value is "3". When the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is "83" and the remainder is "1". In this case, "83" is set in the unit increase counter. If the remainder is 1 or more as a result of dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value, the remainder is stored as a remaining value in the work RAM 73 (step S2105).

  When the process of step S2105 is executed or when it is the update timing of the increase display effect (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether the value of the unit increase counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). If the value of the unit increase counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increase value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). ). The totaling counter is a counter that determines the value when the remaining number of continued games is displayed as the number-of-games image, and the value stored in the totaling counter is displayed as the number-of-games image. When the increase display effect is started, the number of continuing games remaining at that time is set in the total counter.

  In step S2108, the unit increase value is added to the current value of the total counter, whereby the value of the number-of-games image is increased by the unit increase value from the current value. Thereafter, the value of the unit increment counter is decremented by 1 (step S2109).

  If the value of the unit increase counter is “0” (step S2107: NO), the remaining value is added to the totaling counter under the condition that the remaining value is stored in the work RAM 73 (step S2110: YES) Step S2111). As a result, the value of the number-of-games image increases from the current value by the remaining value.

  When the process of step S2109 is executed, or when the determination in step S2110 is negative, or when the process of step S2111 is executed, the image data corresponding to the value of the total counter is grasped as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2112). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S 605), image data for displaying an image corresponding to the value of the current total counter as a game number image is a drawing target It is set. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

  According to the above configuration, the unit increase value fluctuates according to the target increase value when the effect that the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state increases is executed, so the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games It is possible to diversify the mode of increase of the number of games at each update timing of the number-of-games image in the case of

  Further, even in the case of diversifying the mode of increase of the number of continued games in this way, the processing configuration for determining the unit increase value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increase counter, and the game number image The processing configuration for updating is constant regardless of the type of target increase value. This makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while simplifying the processing configuration.

  Further, since the unit increase value according to the target increase value is set, it is possible to make the player predict the target increase value by confirming the unit increase value. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the update mode of the number-of-games image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the increase display effect.

  Note that a plurality of types of division values may be prepared for performing the division processing (step S2102) of the target increase value, and the division processing may be performed using the division values determined by lottery. In this case, even if the target increase value is the same, it is possible to diversify the increase mode of the number of games at each update timing of the number-of-games image when the target increase value is added to the number of continued games.

<Configuration for performing pseudo animation effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the pseudo animation effect will be described.

  The simulated moving image effect is an effect in which moving image display is executed on the symbol display device 41 over the pseudo moving image effecting period. In the pseudo-moving image effect period, a specific update number (for example, 600 times) occurs at which the image update timing at which at least a part of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed is a plurality of times. At each update timing of the image in the pseudo moving image effect period, one still image data 171 to 173 to be used at the update timing is drawn for the whole of the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The image by the one still image data 171 to 173 is displayed over the entire symbol display device 41. In this case, the number of still image data 171 to 173 to be used in the pseudo-moving image effect period is smaller than the specific update frequency.

  Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 stores the first character image data 171 and the effect image data 172 as the still image data 171 to 173 for executing the pseudo moving image effect. And second character image data 173 are stored in advance. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59A, the first character image data 171 is a first character moving image character G42 representing a person as the first character image G41 and a first character moving image character G42. The second pseudo-moving image character G43 representing a person different from the second pseudo-moving image background G44 displayed behind the first pseudo-moving image character G42 and the second pseudo-moving image character G43 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 Image data to be displayed on the entire screen. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

  As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 59 (b), the effect image data 172 displays, as an effect image G45, a light beam image G47 representing a state in which light is emitted from the light source in front of the effect background G46. Image to display the entire image on the symbol display device 41. The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing visual effects, and in addition to the light beam image G47, an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, and an aura representing that the surroundings of the character are emitting light. An image etc. are mentioned. The effect image G45 is an image created using software for creating an image.

  The second character image data 173 is a second character image G48, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59 (c), like the first character image G41, the first pseudo moving image character G42, and the second character image G This is image data for displaying the 2 pseudo moving image character G 43 and the pseudo moving image background G 44 on the entire symbol display device 41. The second character image G48 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

  However, the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G 42 and the second pseudo moving image character G 43 by the second character image data 173 is the first pseudo moving image character G 42 and the second pseudo moving image by the first character image data 171. This is different from the display mode of the character G43. Specifically, the first character, such as the shape of a hand region representing a hand that is a partial region of the first pseudo-moving image character G42, the orientation of a torso region representing a torso, and the relative position of the hand region to the torso region, etc. This is different between the for-image G41 and the second character image G48. In addition, the shape of a hand region representing a hand that is a partial region in the second pseudo-moving image character G43, the orientation of the torso region representing the torso, the relative position of the hand region to the torso region, etc. And the second character image G48.

  Between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, there is no continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42, and the continuity in the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is similarly There is no If there is no continuity in the display mode for the first pseudo animation character G42, the shape of a predetermined area such as the hand area of the first pseudo animation character G42 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined area and the first pseudo The relative position between the moving image character G42 and the other area is different from that at the next image update timing assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41. Similarly, if there is no continuity in the display mode for the second pseudo-moving image character G43, the shape of a predetermined area such as the hand area of the second pseudo-moving image character G43 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined area The relative position between the second character G43 and the other region of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is different from the position at the next image update timing assumed from the display shape of the first character image G41.

  A second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed is set between a first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed and a third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed. Thus, for each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, as compared to the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. Discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. Then, the pseudo animation characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in each of the first display period and the third display period while making the discontinuities of the pseudo animation characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Therefore, while the image data 171, 173 for characters having character images for which the number of character image data 171, 173 is less than the image update timing and the motion of each of the pseudo moving image characters G 42, G 43 is not continuous It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display of the moving image characters G42 and G43 is being performed.

  Each of the first display period for displaying the first character image G41, the second display period for displaying the effect image G45, and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48 has a plurality of image update timings each. The display periods are the same as each other. In the configuration in which the image update timing occurs a plurality of times in each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period is one type as described above. Only. However, in each of the display periods, the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each of the image data 171 to 173, the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn are sequentially made different. The configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state in which ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the respective image data 171 to 173 are made different.

  When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, data is written to all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a or 82b is 800 × 600. It is the number of dots. On the other hand, the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are larger than the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b in the size of the state stored in the memory module 74. It is the number of pixels. And the range which can be drawn by each image data 171-173 of the said initial magnification is larger than frame field 82a, 82b in both horizontal size and vertical size. As a result, it is possible to make the range to be drawn different in one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period. Furthermore, even if the range to be drawn is made different in one kind of image data 171 to 173 to be used in this way, the one kind of image data 171 to 173 in the entire symbol display device 41 It is possible to display an image corresponding to

  The sizes of the states of the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 stored in the memory modules 74 are the same. And the aspect which makes the range used as drawing object different in each image data 171-173 is the same whether it is any of a 1st display period, a 2nd display period, and a 3rd display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, a range closer to a predetermined corner in the image data 171 to 173 to be used is set as a range to be drawn. Then, the modification aspect of the range to be rendered is such that the range to be rendered is gradually moved to the opposite corner side with respect to the predetermined corner at the update timing of the subsequent image. It is set.

  Data for changing the range to be drawn is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as a pseudo moving image table 174 as shown in FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving image table 174. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, in the pseudo moving image table 174, pointer information as serial numbers is set, and drawing range information for determining a range to be drawn corresponding to each pointer information is set. . The pointer information is set to the number of update timings of the image generated in each display period. As a result, by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174 in each display period, it becomes possible to derive drawing range information corresponding to all update timings. Further, since the pseudo moving image table 174 is shared in each display period, the pseudo moving image table 174 is stored in advance as compared with the configuration in which the pseudo moving image table 174 is prepared in advance corresponding to each display period. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storage.

  FIG. 62 is a time chart showing how a pseudo-moving image effect is performed. 62 (a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62 (b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62 (c) shows the third display period, and FIG. 62 (d) shows the use in each display period. A state in which the drawing target range of the target image data 171 to 173 is changed is shown.

  As the pseudo moving image effect is started at the timing of t1, the first display period is started as shown in FIG. 62 (a). Then, the first display period is continued from the timing t1 to the timing t2, but in the meantime, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the range to be drawn in the first character image data 171 is It changes gradually while having a certain directionality.

  At the timing of t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62 (a), and the second display period starts as shown in FIG. 62 (b). Then, the second display period is continued from the timing t2 to the timing t3, but in the meantime, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the range to be drawn in the effect image data 172 is a fixed direction It is changed gradually while having sex. The directionality and the amount of deviation of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period.

  At the timing of t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the third display period starts as shown in FIG. 62 (c). Then, the third display period is continued from the timing t3 to the timing t4, but in the meantime, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the range to be drawn in the second character image data 173 is It changes gradually while having a certain directionality. The directionality and the shift amount of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period and the second display period.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo moving image effect will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing operation processing for producing a simulated moving image effect executed by the display CPU 72. In addition, the calculation process for pseudo-moving image effects is performed in the calculation process for effect in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the pseudo-moving image effects are to be executed.

  If it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). The display CPU 72 reads out, from the memory module 74, an execution target table for controlling the entire flow of the pseudo moving image effect when the pseudo moving image effect is started, and by referring to the execution object table The identification as to whether the display period is applicable and the identification as to whether it is the start timing of each display period are performed.

  If it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). If a negative determination is made in step S2202 or if the process of step S2203 is performed, the first character image data 171 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2204). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving picture table 174 is grasped (step S2205). Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information of the reference object is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented (step S2207).

  As described above, when the calculation process for producing a pseudo-moving image is executed, the first character image data 171 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Be done. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2205 and step S2206 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). If it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving picture table 174 already read out in the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2210). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo moving picture table 174 becomes a use target at the start timing of the second display period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2209, or if the process of step S2210 is executed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2211). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving picture table 174 is grasped (step S2212). Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2213), the pointer information of the reference object is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented (step S2214).

  As described above, when the operation process for producing a pseudo-moving image is executed, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2212 and step S2213 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not this is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). If it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read out in the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0". (Step S2216). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo moving picture table 174 becomes a use target at the start timing of the third display period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2215, or if the process of step S2216 is performed, the second character image data 173 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2217). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information currently being referred to in the pseudo moving picture table 174 is grasped (step S2218). Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information of the reference object is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be the reference object in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented (step S2220).

  As described above, when the calculation process for producing a pseudo-moving image is executed, the second character image data 173 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Be done. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2218 and step S2219 is set in the drawing list.

  Here, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are individually used in an effect different from the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used as display images of round effects to be executed during different round games in the open / close execution mode in which the high-frequency winning mode is selected. . FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for round effect performed by the display CPU 72. In addition, the calculation process for round presentation is performed in the calculation process for presentation of step S704 in a task process (FIG. 19) in the situation which should perform round presentation.

  If it is the first round game execution period (step S 2301: YES), while grasping the first character image data 171 as image data to be used this time (step S 2302), other image data as image data to be used this time It grasps (step S2303). Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2304). As described above, when the operation processing for the round effect is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) is grasped in the first character image data 171 and the step S2303. Image data is set as a drawing target. The parameter information obtained in step S2304 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is the eighth round game execution period (step S2305: YES), while grasping the second character image data 173 as image data to be used this time (step S2306), image data to use other image data this time It grasps as (step S2307). Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2308). As described above, when the calculation process for the round effect is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) is grasped in the image data 173 for the second character and the step S2307. Image data is set as a drawing target. The parameter information obtained in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

  If the game is not the first round game and the eighth round game, other processes are executed (step S2309). In this case, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are not selected as image data to be used.

  As described above, the second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed is set between the first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed and the third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed. ing. Thus, for each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, as compared to the case where the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. Discontinuity of the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. Then, the pseudo animation characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the second display period while making the discontinuities of the pseudo animation characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Therefore, while the image data 171, 173 for characters having character images for which the number of character image data 171, 173 is less than the image update timing and the motion of each of the pseudo moving image characters G 42, G 43 is not continuous It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display of the moving image characters G42 and G43 is being performed.

  In particular, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are image data prepared to display images for round effects in different round games, and from the purpose of use, they are for the first character The continuity of the motion of each of the pseudo animation characters G42 and G43 between the image G41 and the second character image G48 is not required. In this case, as described above, the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 are generated with the display period of the effect image G45 being interposed between them, so that the image for round effect is obtained. Using the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 prepared for display, it is possible to execute a pseudo-moving image effect.

  The drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the simulated moving image effect is changed at each update timing. As a result, it is possible to perform moving image display while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

  The pseudo moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is also used in each display period. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing the storage capacity required for the memory module 74.

<Another form of simulated animation effect>
The character image data 171 and 173 for displaying the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are not limited to the configuration in which only two types exist, and may be configured to exist in three or more types. For example, in addition to the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173, the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed and the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 are pseudo images. The third character image data may be stored in advance in the memory module 74 so that the display modes of the moving image characters G42 and G43 are different. In this case, the first display period in which the first character image data 171 is to be used, the second display period in which the effect image data 172 is to be used, and the second character image data 173 are pseudo moving image effects periods. There is a third display period to be used, a fourth display period to use effect image data 172 or different effect image data, and a fifth display period to use image data for the third character. It will be done.

  The display periods of the pseudo-moving image effect are not limited to the same period each other, and the display periods may be different periods but may be substantially the same period. The at least one display period may be a period that is significantly different from the other display periods. For example, although the first display period and the second display period are the same or substantially the same period, the effect period may be longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. If the display periods are different from each other, the pseudo moving image table 174 is created to correspond to all update timings of the display period which is the longest of the display periods, and this display period is also made in the other display periods. It is possible to use the pseudo animation table 174 as one.

  If the drawing range information derived from the pseudo moving picture table 174 has continuity between the start timing and the end timing, it is assumed that the pseudo moving picture table 174 is used for multiple rounds in one display period in the pseudo moving picture effect. There is no discomfort. In this case, data corresponding to the whole of one display period need not be set in the pseudo moving picture table 174, and it is sufficient if only data corresponding to a part of one display period is set. is there.

  The first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are larger in size than the frame areas 82a and 82b in the size of the initial magnification of the state stored in the memory module 74. The size of the initial magnification is not limited, and the size is the same as or smaller than that of the frame areas 82a and 82b, and enlarged to be larger than the size of the frame areas 82a and 82b after being read from the memory module 74. The processing may be executed. In this case, when used to display an image for round effect, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used at the size of the initial magnification, and the pseudo moving image effect image is used. When used for display, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 may be used at a size obtained by enlarging the size of the initial magnification.

  The method for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b at each update timing in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect is the drawing target in the image data 171 to 173 It is not limited to the method of changing the range. For example, the image data to be displayed may be gradually enlarged and displayed as a result by narrowing the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 gradually. Alternatively, the image data to be displayed may be gradually reduced and displayed as a result by gradually widening the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173.

  In the first display period of the pseudo-moving image effect, only the first character image data 171 is not limited to the image data to be used, and the first character image data 171 is a frame in the first display period. After drawing in the areas 82a and 82b, other image data may be drawn in the range of part of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Even in this case, the first character image G41 is displayed behind the other image data, and the effect image G45 is displayed between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48. By displaying, it is possible for the player to recognize that a moving image by each of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 is displayed.

<Still another form of pseudo animation effect>
-The mode shown to FIG. 65 (a)-FIG.65 (c) is also considered as a mode of pseudo-moving image production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) and FIG. 65 (c), the character G51 for a pseudo animation is displayed in the pseudo animation effect. The first pseudo moving image data and the second pseudo moving image data are stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51, and the first pseudo moving image data is used. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the first pseudo moving image G52 is displayed by being a target, and the second pseudo moving image data is used as a second target as shown in FIG. 65 (c). The pseudo animation image G53 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the first pseudo-moving image G52 displays a state before the predetermined part G51a (specifically, both arms) of the pseudo-moving image character G51 moves along a predetermined movement path, as shown in FIG. In the pseudo moving image G53, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the situation after the predetermined part G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 has been moved along the predetermined movement path is displayed. However, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo animation character G51 between the first pseudo animation image G52 and the second pseudo animation image G53 is separated to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed between the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53. . In the simulated moving image effect image G54, a large number of small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. Further, the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed for a predetermined period, and in the predetermined period, a large number of small individual images G54a are moved along the predetermined movement path of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51. The movie is displayed to move in the same direction as.

  With the above configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of the movement of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo animation character G51 between the first pseudo animation image G52 and the second pseudo animation image G53. Even if the configuration is separated to some extent, the visual effect by the movement of the small individual image G54a in the pseudo moving image effect image G54 causes the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 to be displayed. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined part G51a has moved along the predetermined movement path. Thus, even if the number of pseudo moving image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51 is small, the predetermined portion G51a between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving image display of the pseudo moving image character G51 is being performed while making the discontinuity of the position of the position not to be noticeable.

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration regarding display control is different from that of the first embodiment. The differences from the first embodiment will be described below. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 66, the main control device 50 is provided as in the first embodiment. In addition, the main control unit 50 has a payout control unit 55 for controlling the payout unit 56, a power supply function to each device including the main control unit 50, and a power supply for driving and controlling the game ball shooting mechanism 58. A launch control device 57, a special drawing unit 37 for displaying the result of the game play, and a common drawing unit 38 for displaying the result of the common use open lottery are electrically connected. Further, an audio emission control device 60 for driving and controlling the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and the command transmitted from the audio emission control device 60 is further provided. A display control device 200 is provided to control the symbol display device 41 based on the display.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the display control device 200 includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 201 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads out, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected to the input port 207 mounted on the display control board 206 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 through the input port 207. Be done.

  The display CPU 201 is connected to the work RAM 202, the memory module 203, and the VRAM 204 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on the command received from the audio light emission control device 60. Send a transfer instruction. In addition, the display CPU 201 is connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and based on the command received from the voice emission control device 60, a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 41 to display a three-dimensional image (3D image) Do. The memory module 203, the work RAM 202, the VRAM 204, and the VDP 205 will be described below.

  The memory module 203 stores control data including control programs and fixed value data in advance, and also stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 203 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory which does not require an external power supply for storing data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 200 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the memory module 203 is used as a non-write and read only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The various image data stored in the memory module 203 includes object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data to be attached to the object data, and the backmost image of an image of one frame. And image data for the back side constituting an image of the image.

  Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information constituted by a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygon plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as an origin. That is, in each object data, relative positions (i.e., orientation and size) of each polygon are three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  The texture data is an image to be attached to each polygon of the object data, and by attaching the texture data to the object data, a display image including an image corresponding to the object data, such as a pattern or a character, is generated. The way of holding texture data is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette to be referred to in determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

  The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The way of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state of being compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-like object data (i.e., plate polygon) is used.

  The work RAM 202 is a storage unit for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 203 and transferred and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 200 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 202 is also used for reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203. Then, the display CPU 201 reads control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processing.

  The VRAM 204 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 204 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and storage. Specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 G bits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is satisfactorily performed. Further, the VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when using the pachinko machine 10.

  The VRAM 204 includes a development buffer 211, and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203. Further, the VRAM 204 is provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205.

  The VDP 205 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 211 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 201. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 205 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and its substance is to be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation unit 221, a rendering unit 222, a register 223, and a display circuit 225. Further, these circuits are connected to one another via a bus, and also connected to an I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 and an I / F 227 for the VRAM 204.

  The I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201 in the register 223. The geometry calculation unit 221 reads various image data stored in the memory module 203 into the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 arranges the object data specified as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space finally corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

  The rendering unit 222 adjusts the light source and pastes texture data to each clipped object data based on the drawing list stored in the register 223, and determines the appearance of the object data. In addition, the rendering unit 222 projects each object data on a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, performs various adjustments based on depth information, and draws one frame of drawing data as two-dimensional data. It is created in the buffer 212. The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 205, and the control program and the drawing list The geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may execute processing according to the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read out from the memory module 203 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be configured to execute processing only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

  Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame area 212a and a second frame area 212b are provided. Each of the frame areas 212a and 212b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data of one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 212a and 212b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green) and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  The present invention is not limited to the full color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b in the frame buffer 212, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one of the frame areas. Creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, a double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 212.

  The display circuit 225 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41 a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 212 a or the second frame area 212 b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 225. It is outputted to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 208. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 212 a and 212 b to be output to the display circuit 225. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by performing resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. The display circuit 225 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

<Basic Process in Display CPU 201>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be described.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in the present embodiment. In the V interrupt process, when it is the start timing of the power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S 2401: YES), all the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. It is read out to the texture area 211a (step S2402).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2401 or if the process of step S2402 is performed, command analysis processing is performed (step S2403). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives a strobe signal from the sound light side MPU 62, the display CPU 201 executes command interrupt processing regardless of what processing is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 207 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 202.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the result of the command analysis processing corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S2404: YES), the command corresponding processing is executed (step S2405). In the command corresponding process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203. The execution target table is an information group in which processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image is defined when displaying a moving image corresponding to a received command on the symbol display device 41. is there.

  As the command received by the display CPU 201 from the sound side MPU 62, the command at the start of fluctuation, the command at the start of advance effect production, the command at the start of normal reach, the command at the start of super reach, There are a command at the start of the fixed effect, a command at the start of the standby display, and a command for starting the fixed display. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the game circulation effects corresponding to the respective commands in the symbol display device 41 is read out.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2404 or if the process of step S2405 is performed, task processing is performed (step S2406). In task processing, the VDP 205 is instructed to draw in order to display an image of one frame corresponding to the current update timing by referring to the control data of the current processing cycle in the data table set as the usage target. Set up the various data required above. Specifically, as the various data, address information of an area where image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 203, address information of an area to which image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 204, image data to be controlled is used. There are information on the frame areas 212a and 212b which are targets for drawing data, and various information for generating a 3D image using the virtual three-dimensional space.

  Thereafter, the drawing list output process is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing cycle is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task processing is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task processing is also set. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to the drawing list.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing task processing of step S2406.

  In task processing, first, setting processing for control start is executed (step S2501). In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 201 at the current processing time is executed. Note that the individual image refers to one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back, and one 3D image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. It is.

  About the setting process for control start Specifically, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 202 searches an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in order to control the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one to the individual image grasped as the control start target Reserve free buffer space to Furthermore, the initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the control start parameters corresponding to the individual image are set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  Thereafter, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). The control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed, and is an individual image that may be included in an image of one frame after the current processing cycle.

  Thereafter, background calculation processing is executed (step S2503). In the background processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for lightening and darkening, and projection in the world coordinate system are used for the image for the backmost side that constitutes the image of the background and the background character. A process of computing and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test specification is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect calculation process is executed (step S2504). In the effect calculation process, the above-mentioned various parameters are calculated and derived for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect.

  Thereafter, symbol operation processing is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is executed for an image of a pattern to be subjected to variable display in each game run.

  Incidentally, in each processing of step S2503 to step S2505, processing for updating the control start parameter set in step S2501 is executed. Also, in each processing of step S2503 to step S2505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image in accordance with a specific pattern each time image update timing is used is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 203, and is transferred to the work RAM 202 in advance before the display CPU 201 needs to read the data.

  Thereafter, processing for grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the processing of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, processing of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images that became the control update target in each of the steps S2503 to S2505. Run. The said grasping | ascertainment is performed based on the execution object table currently set. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 201 may be identical to the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 205. In this case, the process of step S2506 is executed. There is no need.

<Basic processing in VDP 205>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 205 will be described.

  The VDP 205 sets the value of the register 223 based on the command sent from the display CPU 201, creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 201, At least the process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 212a and 212b.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 226 for the display CPU 201. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 when the output start timing of the image signal is determined in advance.

  The process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be described. 69 (a) to 69 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer is set, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b is to be created an image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the above-mentioned header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system at the time of creation of the drawing data this time are set. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to become the numerical value information of serial numbers, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information.

  In the drawing list in FIG. 69A, the image data for the back is set as the first drawing object, and the background object A is set as the second, the background object B as the third, and so on. There is. Further, image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the object for effect A is set to the m-th, the object for effect B is set to the m + 1-th,. There is. In addition, the image data for symbols is set as the order after the image data for these effects, for example, the symbol object A is set as the n-th, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1-th, ... There is.

  The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the set order may be the reverse of the above order, and the image for symbols The image data for presentation or the image data for background may be set after the data, and the image data for design is set in the order between the predetermined image data for presentation and the image data for other presentation It may be done.

  The parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... A plurality of types of parameter information are set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the parameter information P (1) of the image data for the back side is information on the address of the area where the image data for the back side is stored in the memory module 203 and the back side. Information when setting the image data for the image (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system and the world coordinates when setting the image data for the back side Information on the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle in the system, information on the scale indicating the magnification at the time of setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, In the case of setting image data, uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) is set.

  Here, coordinate information is set individually for all vertices of object data. Also, the information of this coordinate is set to the object data, but not set to the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state of being attached to the combination of the object data and the texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 205 in texture mapping.

  In the parameter information (P1), when the image data for the back side is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, the camera information including the information of the coordinates and the direction of the virtual camera and the image data for the back side are rendered Information of the light including information of the position and orientation of the virtual light source which determines the shadow in the case is set.

  In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. In the Z-buffer method, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) aligned on the Z axis when many objects or a two-dimensional image overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. For the depth adjustment processing method, the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set to the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, a Z sort method is set as a method of performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 212 a and 212 b for each pixel aligned on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to numerical information corresponding to color information of each pixel aligned on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing of the numerical information and calculation processing for fusion are performed. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, the processing is started when the effect image is displayed.

  In the parameter information (P1), information of α data specification indicating whether or not α data is applied and application target, and information of fog specification indicating whether or not fog is applied and application are set.

  Here, the α value is transmission information of the corresponding pixel. There are two methods of setting the α value on the drawing list: a method of specifying the above-mentioned uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 203 as image data. The alpha data can make the transmission information different for each pixel within the same still image data or the same texture data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting the α value.

  As described above, by uniformly setting the α value and the α data, it is possible to control the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data uniformly for all pixels instead of finely controlling it on a pixel basis. In such a situation, it is possible to reduce the necessary data capacity by being able to cope with the uniform .alpha. Value, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying the .alpha. Data.

  Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, in the Z-axis direction. Fog is used when expressing fog or expressing in a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, fog is applied in a fixed manner to an image of one frame. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, another fog is set to the object in a situation where the texture is not displayed because it is too dark when applying the same fog as the other objects to the object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction. It is good to be configured. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect by setting the fog while preventing the above-mentioned texture from being lost.

  In the other parameters such as the parameter information P (2), as shown in FIG. 69 (c), among the various information in FIG. 69 (b), the information and texture of the object are substituted for the information of the image data for the back side. Information is set. As these pieces of information, information of an address of an area in which an object or texture is stored in the memory module 203 is set.

  The drawing process in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created along with execution of drawing processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed (step S2602).

  In the setting processing for background, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, image data for the back for displaying a background image and object data for displaying a character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether the image data and object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a vacant buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a vacant buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Thereafter, the memory module 203 grasps and reads the address at which the image data is stored, and coordinates values of the local coordinate system for the image data so as to become the coordinates, rotation angle and scale specified in the drawing list. Is converted into coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and is set in the secured buffer area.

  If it is allocated, the update processing of various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area is executed. In addition, in the setting processing for background, control termination processing is executed to delete the image data for background not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  After that, setting processing for effect is executed (step S2603). In the effect setting process, among the image data designated in the current drawing list, object data for displaying an effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control end process is executed to delete the image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  Thereafter, a setting process for symbols is executed (step S2604). In the setting process for symbols, among the image data specified in the current drawing list, object data for displaying symbols is grasped. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, processing for starting arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting processing for background. If it is allocated, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for symbols, control end processing is executed to delete the image data for symbols not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the processing in steps S2602 to S2604 is executed, and as a drawing list, it is specified as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale which are also designated by the drawing list is completed. Note that FIG. 71 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

  Thereafter, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint are determined by the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set to the origin as the viewpoint based on the coordinates and the orientation of the viewpoint Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, the viewpoint PC 11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

  Here, camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in actuality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. . As described above, by setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image, it is possible to perform viewpoint switching individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is enhanced. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  Thereafter, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S2606). In the conversion process to the view coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted to the view coordinate system corresponding to the view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  Thereafter, clipping processing is executed (step S2607). In the clipping process, the individual images extracted in step S2606 are grasped with the corresponding viewpoints as the common origin. Then, each individual image extracted in step S2606 on the basis of the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the frame area 212a, 212b (that is, the symbol display device 41) to be drawn in that state. Clip.

  Thereafter, the writing process is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the information of the light designated by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  Thereafter, color information setting processing is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or in vertex units for each object extracted by the clipping process. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process is performed to paste texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping process. Also, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping may be performed.

  Thereafter, in steps S2610 and S2611, each individual image extracted in step S2607 and further subjected to the lighting process and the setting process of color information is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection) Create drawing data by parallel projection.

  Specifically, first, drawing data creation processing for effect and background is executed (step S2610). In the rendering data creation process for rendering and background, by performing projection on the screen area PC 12 while performing hidden surface removal on the image data and object data for the backmost image set as the background image, Create drawing data for Further, rendering is performed on the screen area PC 12 while performing hidden surface removal on object data set as a rendering image, thereby creating rendering data for rendering.

  Here, the VRAM 204 is provided with a screen buffer 214 as shown in FIG. 66, and the screen buffer 214 is used for rendering and background, in which drawing data for background and drawing data for effect are collectively written. A buffer and a buffer for symbols to which drawing data for symbols are written are set. In addition, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC 12 is set in the effect and background buffers and the pattern buffer. The background drawing data and effect drawing data created in step S2610 are such that the drawing data for effect is overwritten on a part of the area in the background drawing data, and the effect and background buffer are created. Will be written. When background image data is not specified in the drawing list, background drawing data is not created, and when effect image data is not specified in the drawing list, for effect Drawing data is not created.

  Thereafter, drawing data creation processing for symbols is executed (step S2611). In the drawing data creation process for symbols, the projection on the screen area PC 12 is performed while performing hidden surface elimination on the object data set as a symbol, so that the buffer for symbols in the buffer for screen 214 is used for symbols. Create drawing data. In addition, when the image data for symbols is not designated in the drawing list, the drawing data for symbols is not created.

  Thereafter, drawing data combining processing is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data combining process, the drawing data for effect and background separately created in the screen buffer 214 by the processes of step S2610 and step S2611 are combined with the drawing data for symbol, and the combined result is It is written as drawing data of one frame in the frame areas 212 a and 212 b to be drawn.

  In this case, the order of writing is defined so as to line up from the back side to the front side in the order of rendering data for presentation and background → drawing data for symbols. Therefore, first, drawing data for effect and background is written to the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn, and then drawing data for a pattern is written. At this time, the image on the back side is used as it is when the completely transparent α value is set to the pixel for which drawing is to be executed, and the α value is used when the semitransparent α value is set. The fusion of the image on the back side and the image on the front side at the ratio used as the reference is performed, and when the alpha value of opacity is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. , Blending operations are performed.

  Incidentally, each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, but an alpha value of completely transparent is set for a blank portion where projection is not performed in drawing data for symbols.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec. Also, although an image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data, the double buffer method is adopted as described above, so the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the corresponding frame. In addition, the display circuit 225 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 212a and 212b to be referred to each time the output of an image signal for one frame is completed, and switching of the drawing circuit is performed by the selector circuit. The frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn are restricted not to be output targets for outputting an image signal.

  Steps S2602 to S2607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 221, and steps S2608 to S2612 are processes executed by the rendering unit 222.

<Configuration for performing time-based presentation>
Next, a configuration for performing time-correspondence presentation will be described.

  The time-correspondence effect is an effect in which the pachinko machine 10 is in an effect state corresponding to time for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) every time the time becomes a predetermined time. As the predetermined time, for example, a configuration may be considered which is set to be an hour interval such as 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock, 12 o'clock, and so on. In addition, for the effect state corresponding to time, specifically, a background image corresponding to time is displayed in the symbol display device 41, and the light emission mode in the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 also correspond to time It becomes an aspect. In addition, when it becomes the production state corresponding to time, the special corresponding image can be displayed in the game turn which becomes the big hit result, or the probability that the special corresponding image is displayed in the game turn which becomes the big hit is time corresponding Higher than in the non-represented state. By setting the pachinko machine 10 to be in an effect state corresponding to the time when the predetermined time comes, for example, when a plurality of the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are provided. At the same time, it is possible to simultaneously perform time-corresponding effects.

  In order to enable execution of time-correspondence presentation, as shown in FIG. 66, the sound emission control device 60 is provided with an RTC 65. The RTC 65 can output time information to the sound side MPU 62. The RTC 65 has its own backup power supply, and can manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. By acquiring time information from the RTC 65 as necessary, the sound light side MPU 62 can specify whether the time at the acquisition timing is the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time-correspondence presentation. Then, when the time information acquired from the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time-corresponding effect, the sound-light side MPU 62 executes processing for starting the time-corresponding effect.

  The manner in which the time-correspondence effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 (a) shows a normal period which is a period during which time-based rendering is not performed, FIG. 72 (b) shows a preparation period which is a part of the execution period of time-based rendering, and FIG. The special period which is a part of the execution period of time-correspondence presentation and starts after the preparation period is shown. Further, FIG. 73 (a) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the normal period, and FIG. 73 (b) is an explanation for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the preparation period. FIG. 73 (c) is an explanatory diagram for describing display contents of the symbol display device 41 in a special period.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 becomes time information corresponding to the start trigger of the time-based effect at the timing of t1 in the normal period in which the time-based effect is not executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the normal period ends at the timing of t1, and the preparation period starts. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73 (a) to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b) .

  In the display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, the contents of the backmost image displayed in the background image are different, and the type of the background individual image displayed in front of the backmost image Is different. Specifically, while the background individual images G61a and G61b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period are two, the background individual images G62a to G62a displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period G62d is four. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes brighter in the preparation period than in the normal period, and the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. In addition, in the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 for notifying information corresponding to the remaining time until the special period is started is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed by subtraction. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. In addition, although the display mode of a symbol is the same by a normal period and a preparation period, it is good also as a structure by which the display mode of a symbol is changed.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), the preparation period ends at the timing of t2 and the special period starts. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period as shown in FIG. 73 (c) .

  In the display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period, the contents of the backmost image displayed in the background image are different, and the type of the background individual image displayed in front of the backmost image Is different. Specifically, while the background individual images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period are four, the background individual images G64a displayed on the display mode corresponding to the special period G64g is seven pieces. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes brighter in the special period than in the preparation period, and it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 41. Further, in the special period, a special notification image G65 for notifying that it is a special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible to make the player clearly recognize that it is a special period. In addition, although the display mode of a symbol is the same by a preparation period and a special period, it is good also as a structure by which the display mode of a symbol is changed.

  At the timing t3 at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72 (c), and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72 (a). . Thereafter, time-correspondence presentation is executed at timing t4 to timing t6 and timing t7 to timing t9. In this case, the period from the start of the time-corresponding effect in the predetermined execution time to the start of the time-corresponding effect in the next execution time is constant at Tf1. In addition, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period in the execution times of each time-correspondence effect is also fixed at Tf2. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously start time-matching effects in a plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to simultaneously start a special period in a plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  As described above, the time-based effect is regularly executed using the time information of the RTC 65. However, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached during the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode is continued. While the background image for the symbol display device 41 and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed as the background image of the symbol display device 41, the special image as the background image for the symbol display device 41 is further displayed. The backmost image for the period and the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are not displayed. However, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be displayed overlapping with a part of the image for the opening / closing mode from the front, and during the special period, the part for the image for the opening / closing mode is the foreground The special notification image G65 is displayed in such a manner as to be displayed superimposed from the top. In this way, the player is given an execution period of the time-correspondence effect while suitably enhancing the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the open / close execution mode by giving priority to and executing the effect for the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to make it recognize. In addition, even in the open / close execution mode, the game hall manager can grasp that the time-effective rendering execution period is originally supposed to be performed, and comparing the plurality of pachinko machines 10, there is an abnormality in the RTC 65 It becomes possible to perform the operation of checking whether or not it has occurred regardless of whether or not in the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 are time-responsive modes from the start timing of the time-correspondence effect even in the open / close execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker unit 45 can be aligned in a mode corresponding to time in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  When the open / close execution mode is ended in a situation where the time corresponding presentation is started during the open / close execution mode and the time is normally a period in which the time corresponding presentation is being performed, the end timing corresponds to the preparation period. If there is, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period is started as the background image of the symbol display device 41, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. In addition, if the end timing of the open / close execution mode corresponds to the special period, the backmost image for the special period and the background individual image G64a to 64g for the special period as the background image of the symbol display device 41. The display is started and the display of the special notification image G65 is continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for time-correspondence presentation according to the original execution mode to be performed.

  The maximum duration of the open / close execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. As a result, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in the open / close execution mode, the open / close execution mode ends in the middle of the execution time of the time-based effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunity for time-correspondence presentation according to the original execution mode to be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the longest duration of the open / close execution mode may be configured to be longer than the execution period of time-correspondence presentation.

  When it is time to start the time-based presentation in the situation where the presentation for the game run is being performed, the presentation for the game circulation is not being performed and the presentation for the open / close execution mode is not being performed. The start mode of the time-based effect is different from that when the effect starts. Specifically, when it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where effects for gaming are being executed, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The display mode of the effect for game circulation of is continued. That is, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period as the background image of the symbol display device 41 is not started. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be displayed superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as an effect for game use from the front. Incidentally, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap with the symbol so as not to reduce the symbol visibility.

  Hereinafter, how time-based rendering is executed in relation to the execution status of the rendering for a game will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 75 (a) shows the start timing of the time-based effect, and FIG. 75 (b) is the execution period of the demonstration display executed in a situation where neither the effect for the game circulation nor the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is performed. FIG. 75 (c) shows the execution period of the effect for the game circulation, FIG. 75 (d) shows the preparation period, and FIG. 75 (e) shows the delay during the image display as shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 75 (f) shows a display period of a preparation period image in which an image as shown in FIG. 73 (b) is displayed as a background image, and FIG. 75 (g) shows a special period. (H) shows the light emission control period corresponding to time.

  First, a case will be described where it is time to start the time-based presentation in a situation where the presentation for the game and the presentation for the open / close execution mode are not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), at the timing of t1 in the execution period of the demonstration display, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), it becomes the start timing of time-correspondence presentation. In this case, at the timing of t1, the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (d), and the display of the preparation period image is started as shown in FIG. 75 (f). Further, at the timing of the time t1, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the display light emitting unit 44 starts light emission in a mode corresponding to time. Also in the speaker unit 45, the output of music in a mode corresponding to time is started at the timing of t1.

  After that, at the timing of t2 which is in the middle of the preparation period, as shown in FIG. In this case, the variable display of the symbol is started in the state where the background image for the preparation period is displayed. That is, the variable display of symbols is started in the state where the display of the background image for the preparation period according to the mode according to the display pattern till then is continued.

  Thereafter, at timing t3 during the execution of the game effect, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state in which the variation display of the symbol according to the mode according to the display pattern up to that point is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), as the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing of t4, which is the situation where the demonstration display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The special period ends, and along with that, the time-corresponding presentation of the current execution time ends. At the timing of the t4, the light emission in the mode corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 is ended as shown in FIG. 75 (h). Also in the speaker unit 45, the output of music according to the mode corresponding to time is stopped at the timing of t4. In addition, when the execution period secured as a special period in the situation where the effect for the game circulation is executed, the effect for the game circulation ends and the presentation for the game circulation is newly started. The special period ends when the display is started or the demonstration display is started.

  Next, the case where it becomes the start timing of time-correspondence production in the situation where the production for game circulation is executed is explained.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c), at the timing of t5 in the execution period of the effect for game use, it becomes the start timing of time-correspondence effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In this case, although the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (d) at the timing of t5, the display of the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b) is never started. As shown in FIG. 75 (e), the delaying period is started. In the delaying period, as described above, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while continuing the image display of the effects for the game use according to the display pattern up to that point.

  On the other hand, at the timing of the time t5, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the display light emitting unit 44 starts light emission in a mode corresponding to time. Also in the speaker unit 45, output of music in an aspect corresponding to time is started at the timing of t5. As a result, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker unit 45 can be aligned in a mode corresponding to time in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c) at time t6, the game circulation effect which has been executed is ended, and at time t7, a new game circulation effect is started. At the timing of t7, the delaying period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (e), and the display of the background image for the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (f). That is, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached during the execution of the effect for the game run, the display of the background image for the preparation period is not performed as a delaying period until the effect for the game run is finished, When the effect for the game circulation is ended and the effect for the new game circulation is started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started. In addition, when the effect for the game cycle is ended and the effect for the new game cycle is not started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the demonstration display is started. As a result, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started from the end of the game circulation effect to the start of a new game circulation effect or the period until the demonstration display is started. It can be used as a control period for Note that the demonstration display is started when 0.5 seconds have elapsed without a presentation for a new game session or a presentation for an opening / closing execution mode being started after the game session presentation is over.

  After that, at the timing of t8 during the execution of the effects for the game, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state in which the variation display of the symbol according to the mode according to the display pattern up to that point is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), as the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing of t9 which is a state where the demonstration display is being performed as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The special period ends, and along with that, the time-corresponding presentation of the current execution time ends. At the timing of the time t9, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the light emission in the mode corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 is ended. Also in the speaker unit 45, the output of music according to the mode corresponding to time is stopped at the timing of t9.

  As described above, when it is time to start the time-based effect in the situation where the effects for the game are being executed, the display mode of the effects for the game for the background image, effect image and symbol image is continued On the other hand, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be displayed superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as an effect for game play from the front. As a result, while maintaining the display of the image according to the contents already determined as the effects for the game, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-based effect is being executed.

  In particular, when it is attempted to start the display of the background image for the preparation period in a situation where super reach is performed in which a reach character image is displayed as an effect for gaming, to display the image on the symbol display device 41 The number of types of image data used for image processing may be extremely large, and the processing load may be extremely high. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in a situation where the effects for the game are being executed, it is already determined as the effect for the game only by adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the content is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

  Here, the duration Tf3 of the preparation period is constant, and the duration Tf3 is set to be longer than the longest variation display time that can be selected in the game circulation effect. Thereby, even if the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in a situation where the effects for the game session are being executed, the variable display time of the effect for the game session and the start timing of the time-based effect are not The effects of the game routine during execution are ended before the preparation period has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period is started.

  Thus, when the special period is started by securing the period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed, the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. 73 (c) from the start timing thereof. It becomes possible to start displaying the As a result, it becomes possible to easily start the display of the background image for the special period in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 simultaneously.

  Next, a data configuration for executing time-correspondence presentation will be described.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76A, the sound light side ROM 63 stores in advance a data table 231 for time-correspondence effect. The time correspondence effect data table 231 is a table referred to in the sound light side MPU 62 for performing execution control of the time correspondence effect. FIG. 76 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the data table 231 for time-correspondence effect.

  The pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in the data table 231 for time corresponding effect, and various timing information, light emission data, and sound output data are made to correspond to each pointer information. A combination has been set. The start timing of the preparation period, the transfer timing of the image data group 233 for the special period, the end timing of the preparation period, and the start timing of the special period by referring to information of various timings corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced. The sound light side MPU 62 can specify the return timing of the image data group for normal effect and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period. In addition, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed by using the light emission data (PD (0), PD (1),...) Corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to. The light emission mode can be made to correspond to the time, and the sound output data (SD (0), SD (1),...) Corresponding to the pointer information to be referred is used in the speaker unit 45. By executing the sound output control, it becomes possible to set the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 to the mode corresponding to time.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, in the memory module 203 of the display control device 200, an image data group 232 for a preparation period, an image data group 233 for a special period, a remaining time correspondence table 234, and a preparation period table 235. The special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 are stored in advance. The image data group 232 for the preparation period includes image data for displaying the image on the back of the preparation period, image data for displaying the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period, and notification of the remaining time Image data for displaying the image G63 is included. The image data group 233 for the special period includes image data for displaying the backmost image for the special period, image data for displaying the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period, and a special notification image. Image data for displaying G65 is included.

  The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for display control of the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period regardless of whether it is a delay period or not, and each pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame Correspondingly, parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set. The preparation period table 235 is data for display control of the background image for the preparation period in the preparation period which is not the delay period, and preparation is made corresponding to each pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame. Parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying a background image for a period is set. Since the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are separately provided, display control for the preparation period is performed in the delay period when the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even in the preparation period. By referring to only the remaining time correspondence table 234, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed. On the other hand, by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the table for preparation period 235 in the preparation period but other than the delay period, the remaining time is notified in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed. It becomes possible to display the image G63.

  The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for display control of the special notification image G65 in the special period regardless of whether or not the open / close execution mode, and each pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame Correspondingly, parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set. The special period table 237 is data for display control of the background image for the special period in the special period which is not the open / close execution mode, corresponding to each pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame, Parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying a background image for a special period is set. By separately providing the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237, display control for the special period is performed in a period in which the background image for the special period is not displayed even in the special period. By referring only to the special notification correspondence table 236, it becomes possible to display the special notification image G65 in a situation where the background image for the special period is not displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the special period is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the special notification is displayed by referring to both the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237. It becomes possible to display the image G65.

  As described above, the special period ends when the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed, but when the effect for the game cycle is being executed or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed If the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed in the case where it is, then the effect for the game cycle during the execution or the effect for the open / close execution mode is ended and the effect for the game cycle is newly started End when the display is started or the demonstration display is newly started. Then, when the special period ends, the normal effect is restored. Corresponding to this, the special period table 237 is set corresponding to a period longer than the longest period in which the special period can be continued. Thereby, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, it becomes possible to continue the special period until the end timing occurs.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing time-based effects will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an RTC corresponding process performed by the sound light side MPU 62. The RTC corresponding process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  If it is the start timing of the preparation period (step S2701: YES), setting processing for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the setting process for starting the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, first, the data table 231 for time-based effect is read from the sound side ROM 63 to the sound side RAM 64 (step S2801). Thereafter, a read instruction command for preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing command corresponding processing executed by the display CPU 201. The command response process is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation period data read instruction command (step S 2901: YES), data other than texture data in the image data group 232 for preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. The transfer is made (step S2902). The texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211 a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the process of step S2902, regardless of whether or not the delay period is started when the preparation period is started, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period start at the start of the preparation period. It will be in the state read to the expansion buffer 211. This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether the current state is a delay target situation (step S2803). The situation in which the effect for the game circulation is being executed or the situation in which the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If it is a delay target situation (step S2803: YES), “1” is set to the in-delay flag provided in the sound light side RAM 64 (step S2804). The in-delay flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 62 that it is a delay period. Thereafter, a delay command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the delay command (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the remaining time correspondence table 234 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). Thereby, the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is started in the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), when the current state is not the delay target state (step S2803: NO), "1" is set in the preparation display flag provided in the sound side RAM 64. (Step S2806). The preparation display flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 62 that the background image for the preparation period is displayed. Thereafter, the preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S2905: YES), the display CPU 201 executes read processing for the preparation period (step S2906). In the read processing for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 has already been read out to the work RAM 202, the preparation period table 235 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 to cope with the remaining time in the work RAM 202. It is assumed that both the table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read out. Further, in the read processing for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is not read out to the work RAM 202, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. . By reading out both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 to the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

  Returning to the explanation of the RTC corresponding process (FIG. 78), when the preparation period is underway (step S2703: YES), the setting process during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81, neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the transfer timing of the data (steps S3001 and S3002: NO) If "1" is set (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the delay cancellation timing (step S3004). If a delay period has occurred due to the start timing of the time-based effect being produced in the situation where the effect for the game effect is being executed, the effect for the game effect is ended and the effect for a new game effect It is determined that it is the delay cancellation timing when either is started or the demonstration display is started. In addition, when a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect being produced in the situation where the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed, the effect for the open / close execution mode is ended and a new game is performed. It is determined that it is the delay cancellation timing when the effect for circulation is started or the demonstration display is started.

  When it is the delay cancellation timing (step S3004: YES), the in-delay flag of the sound light side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3005), and "1" is set to the preparation display flag of the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3005). Step S3006). Thereafter, the preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing contents of the display CPU 201 when the preparation display start command is received are as described above.

  In the setting process during the preparation period, when it is determined that it is the data transfer timing based on the time corresponding rendering data table 231 (step S3002: YES), the special period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 ( Step S3008). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives a command to read out special period data (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 performs memory module processing on data other than texture data in the image data group 233 for special period. The data is transferred from the buffer 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). The texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211 a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the process of step S2908, all the image data group 233 for the special period is read out to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 before the special period is started. Thus, it becomes possible to start early display of the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 at the start of the special period, and at the same time, the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 are updated in the special period. It can be done smoothly.

  Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 81) during the preparation period, when it is determined that the preparation period end timing is based on the time-table effect data table 231 (step S3001: YES), the sound light RAM 64 is being delayed. The flag and the preparation display flag are cleared to "0" (step S3009), and the special period flag provided in the sound light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag for specifying that the sound period MPU 62 is the special period. Thereafter, a special period start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), it transfers the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 into the work RAM 202, display of the special notification image G65 is started in the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether or not it is the open / close execution mode. Further, in the situation where the open / close execution mode is not in effect, display of a background image for special effect is started in the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the explanation of the RTC corresponding process (FIG. 78), if it is in the special period (step S2705: YES), the setting process in the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, if it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), whether or not it is the data recovery timing based on the data table 231 for time-based effect presentation Is determined (step S3102). If it is determined that it is the data recovery timing (step S3102: YES), a read instruction command for normal period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives a command to read out normal period data (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 displays a background image for normal effect in a situation in which time-based effects are not being executed. Data other than texture data in the image data group to be transferred are transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

  Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 82) during the special period, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period based on the data table 231 for time corresponding effect (step S3101: YES) The process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the time-responsive effect to the normal effect. The recoverable status is the end timing of the execution period when the demonstration display is performed at the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period, and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period. If the effect for the game run or the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed, the effect for the game run during the execution or the effect for the open / close execution mode is ended and the effect for the game run is newly started Timing or timing at which a demonstration display is started.

  If it is a return possible state (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and sound output control for the special period are ended (step S3105). Thereby, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 according to the aspect for the normal effect in the situation where the time corresponding presentation is not performed, and the speaker unit 45 in the aspect for the normal presentation in the situation where the time corresponding presentation is not performed Sound output control is resumed. Thereafter, the special period flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” (step S3106), and a special period end command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period end command (step S2913: YES), a table for displaying a background image for normal effect in a situation where the time-based effect is not executed. Are transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). Thus, the display of the background image for the special period is ended in the symbol display device 41, and the display of the background image for the normal effect is resumed. In the command handling process, when another command is received, a process corresponding to that is executed (step S2915).

  Next, the table setting process in the present embodiment executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. The table setting process is performed in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). To be executed.

  If the variable command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), storage processing of the game result is executed (step S3202). Specifically, based on the information contained in the type command, it is specified which is the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game run, and the specification The written information is written to the sound side RAM 64.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation command received from the main side MPU 52 this time is the fluctuation display time corresponding to the occurrence of reach effect (step S3203: YES), a lottery process for determining the type of reach effect Execute the selection process of the lottery table to be used. Specifically, when the preparation display flag of the sound light side RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3204: YES), the lottery table for the preparation period is set to the sound light side ROM 63. To the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3205). If the special period flag of the sound light side RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3206: YES), the special period lottery table is read out from the sound light side ROM 63 to the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3207) . If “1” is not set in any of the preparation display flag and the special period flag (step S3206: NO), the normal period lottery table is read from the sound side ROM 63 to the sound side RAM 64. Then, the reach effect lottery process is executed using the lottery table selected as the current use target among the preparation period lottery table, the special period lottery table and the normal period lottery table (step S3209). In the reach effect lottery process, the current value of the reach lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the lottery table selected as the current use target. And the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as a result of the current reach effect lottery process.

  Here, a plurality of reach effects are set, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image on the symbol display device 41 is different for each reach effect. The difference in processing load occurs in accordance with the type of image data used to display the reach effect image and the size of the image data. The reach effect includes a large load effect where the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is the largest, and a medium load effect where the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is smaller than the heavy load effect , And a small load effect in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is smaller than that of the medium load effect. In this case, the normal period lottery table includes all of the high-load effects, the medium-load effects, and the low-load effects as the types of reach effects to be selected. On the other hand, the drawing table for the preparation period does not include the high-load effect and the medium-load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected, but includes the low-load effect. Further, the special period lottery table does not include heavy-load effects and medium-load effects and small-load effects as types of reach effects to be selected.

  Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period as described above, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than that of the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, in the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where a large load effect is displayed while displaying the background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It becomes possible not to occur.

  When starting the special period, it is necessary to perform initial setting to the world coordinate system for all image data necessary to display the background image for the special period, and therefore VDP 205 compared to when the special period is updated. The processing load of On the other hand, in the preparation period which occurs before the special period, the heavy load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effect. Thereby, even if transition to the special period occurs in a situation where the game circulation effect started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is in the middle of execution of the heavy load presentation and the medium load presentation It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  As described above, the execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game play. As a result, even if a large-load effect or a medium-load effect can be executed as a reach effect in the effects for the game run started in the normal period, the reach effects end by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, as described above, the high load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the game circulation effect started in the preparation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load effect or the medium load effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  It should be noted that the special period lottery table includes reach effects in which a special correspondence image is displayed as a reach effect that can be selected in the game round that results in a big hit, and the regular period lottery table and the preparation period lottery table It does not include reach presentation in which the special corresponding image is displayed. This makes it possible to set an effect that occurs only during the special period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or if the process of step S3209 is performed, stop symbol determination processing is performed (step S3210). The contents of the stop symbol determination process are the same as step S407 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S3211). The setting process of the control pattern table corresponds to the combination of the presence or absence of reach effect, the result of reach effect lottery process (step S3209) when reach effect occurs, and the result of stop symbol determination process (step S3210) The control pattern table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

  Thereafter, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S3212). In the processing, the information of the fluctuation display time of the current game is identified from the content of the fluctuation command currently received from the main MPU 52, and the information of the specified fluctuation display time is provided in the sound light side RAM 64. Set to the fluctuation time counter. The fluctuation time counter is a counter for specifying with the sound light side MPU 62 the timing of ending the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and starting the finalized display of the symbol in the present game round. The value set in the fluctuation time counter is decremented by 1 each time the sound processing MPU 62 starts the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), that is, 4 msec has elapsed.

  Thereafter, a variation pattern command including information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). Thereby, the display CPU 201 starts the effect for the game use in the symbol display device 41, and advances the effect for the game use in the aspect according to the effect contents determined by the sound light side MPU 62. In this case, when it is determined that reach effect is generated in the current game, the reach effect selected in step S3209 is executed by the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, processes other than the above processes are executed in step S3214. The contents of the other processes are the same as step S415 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

  As described above, when the time information of the RTC 65 has become the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time-based effect, the time-based effect is started. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute a predetermined effect when the predetermined time is reached. Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, it becomes possible to simultaneously start time-correspondence rendering on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  In this case, when the time-correspondence presentation is started, the preparation period occurs first, and when the preparation period has elapsed, the display content of the image on the symbol display device 41 is more flashy than the preparation period. A period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the special period will occur from now on, and it is possible to gradually increase the expectation for the generation of the special period. Further, in the preparation period, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and in the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed by subtraction. This makes it possible to make the player clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

  When the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in a situation where the effects for the game are being executed, the background image, the effect image and the symbol image continue the display mode of the effects for the game until then, the game A remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be displayed superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as the effect for circulation from the front. As a result, while maintaining the display of the image according to the contents already determined as the effects for the game, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-based effect is being executed.

  In particular, when it is attempted to start the display of the background image for the preparation period in a situation where super reach is performed in which a reach character image is displayed as an effect for gaming, to display the image on the symbol display device 41 The number of types of image data used for image processing may be extremely large, and the processing load may be extremely large. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in a situation where the effects for the game are being executed, it is already determined as the effect for the game only by adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the content is maintained. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

  The duration of the preparation period is constant, and the duration is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the presentation for the game cycle. Thereby, even if the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in a situation where the effects for the game session are being executed, the variable display time of the effect for the game session and the start timing of the time-based effect are not The effects of the game routine during execution are ended before the preparation period has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period is started.

  In this way, by ensuring that the background image for the preparation period is displayed, it is possible to start displaying the background image for the special period from the start timing when the special period is started. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to easily start the display of the background image for the special period in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 simultaneously.

  Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, in the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where a large load effect is displayed while displaying the background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It becomes possible not to occur.

  When starting the special period, it is necessary to perform initial setting to the world coordinate system for all image data necessary to display the background image for the special period, and therefore VDP 205 compared to when the special period is updated. The processing load of On the other hand, in the preparation period which occurs before the special period, the heavy load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effect. Thereby, even if transition to the special period occurs in a situation where the game circulation effect started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is in the middle of execution of the heavy load presentation and the medium load presentation It is possible to prevent it from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  The execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game play. As a result, even if a large-load effect or a medium-load effect can be executed as a reach effect in the effects for the game run started in the normal period, the reach effects end by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, in the effect of the game circulation started in the preparation period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load effect or the medium load effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  The light emission according to the time corresponding aspect in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output according to the time corresponding aspect in the speaker unit 45 are whether or not the rendering for the game round is in progress when the time corresponding start timing is reached. It is started regardless. Thereby, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in the situation where the effects for the game run are being executed, the background image for the preparation period in the symbol display device 41 until the effect for the game run is ended. Even if the contents of the background image in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are not uniform due to the delayed display, the plurality of pachinko pachinko machines are the light emission contents of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output contents from the speaker unit 45 It is possible to start the machine 10 simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression that time-correspondence effects are simultaneously started in a plurality of pachinko machines 10.

<Another form of time-based effects>
-In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed by the symbol display device 41 in the preparation period, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is the display for the preparation period It may be configured as an aspect, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display aspect corresponding to the preparation period. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed in the symbol display device 41 during the special period, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is for the special period The configuration may be a display mode, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special period.

  -When the execution period secured as a special period has elapsed in a situation where a demonstration display is being performed on the symbol display device 41, a predetermined time (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from the timing when the execution period has elapsed. It is also possible to return to the normal effect when the special period ends. In this case, the image data group for normal rendering can be returned to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 using the predetermined time, and the image data group for normal rendering is set in the world coordinate system. It is possible to perform initial settings for

  -Even when the execution period secured as a special period in the situation where the effects for the game run are executed, the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed following the effect for the game run The special period may end when the effect for the game cycle is ended. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long time.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration that uses the RTC 65 to specify the start timing of the time correspondence presentation, for example, since the time correspondence presentation was started last time using the timer counter provided in the sound light side RAM 64 The elapsed time may be measured, and the sound-light side MPU 62 may be configured to specify that it is the start timing of the time-correspondence effect when the measured elapsed time becomes a time corresponding to the generation cycle of the time-correspondence effect. .

  The texture data to be used is not read out from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 starts, but all of the texture data needs to be used. It may be configured to be read out each time. In this case, in step S2902 in the command handling process (FIG. 80), all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is read, and in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read. The entire image data group for displaying the background image for normal effect is read out.

  In the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84, symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the section display area G66 set in a part of the symbol display device 41, and areas other than the section display area G66 In the above, the background image for the preparation period may be displayed. This makes it possible to emphasize and display the preparation period.

  In the preparation period, a new start of the game circulation effect may be restricted, and the restricted state may be canceled when the special period is started. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the special period from being started during the execution of the game rendition.

  -When neither the effect for game circulation nor the effect for opening / closing execution mode is executed when the start timing of the time-based effect comes, the special period is started without passing through the preparation period, the time response When the effect for the game run or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed when the start timing of the effect comes, the preparation period is during the effect is being performed, and the effect during the execution is The special period may be started when it ends.

  -At least one of the light emission control period corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control period corresponding to the time in the speaker unit 45 is after a predetermined second has elapsed with respect to the start timing of the time corresponding rendering in the symbol display device 41 The configuration may be started. In this case, it is preferable that the control period to be started after a predetermined number of seconds has elapsed is started before the special period is started in the symbol display device 41.

<Still another form of time-based presentation>
-In this separate form, when it becomes the start timing of time-based effect in the situation where the effect for game circulation or the effect for opening and closing execution mode is executed, the effect or opening and closing execution mode for game circulation during its execution The images for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 are not displayed at all until the effect for the purpose is finished. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for causing the operation will be described. In addition, the description is fundamentally abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing setting processing for starting a preparation period in this embodiment.

  First, the data table 231 for time-correspondence effect is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). Thereafter, a read instruction command for preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). As a result, as in the above embodiment, the display CPU 201 transfers data other than texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. The texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211 a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started.

  After executing the process of step S3302, it is determined whether the current state is a delay target situation (step S3303). The situation in which the effect for the game circulation is being executed or the situation in which the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If it is a delay target situation (step S3303: YES), "1" is set in the in-delay flag provided in the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3304).

  If the current state is not the delay target situation (step S3303: NO), "1" is set in the preparation display flag provided in the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3305). Thereafter, a duration for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3306). Since it is a case where a preparation period is started at the start timing of time correspondence production this time, the continuation period of the display for preparation turns into time from the start timing of time correspondence production to the start timing of a special period. Then, information corresponding to the duration for preparation display calculated in step S3306 is set as the preparation display start command read from the sound light side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparation display start command is displayed on the display CPU 201 It transmits (step S3308).

  FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing command corresponding processing in this embodiment. When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 recognizes the remaining period of the preparation period from the preparation display start command (step S3402). Then, in the case where subtraction display of the count value is performed in the remaining time notification image G63 from the fixed start value (for example, "60") to the fixed end value (for example, "0") within the range of the remaining period of the preparation period. The update period of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed start value, and while the count value update cycle and the subtraction value of the count value in one update cycle (specifically, "1") are made constant, The update period of the count value necessary to make the count value become the fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period is calculated. Then, the preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read out from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). Thus, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated in accordance with the update cycle calculated in step S3403. In the command corresponding process, processes other than the above process are also executed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing setting processing during a preparation period in the present embodiment.

  If neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3501 and step S3502: NO), but the delay flag in the sound light side RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3503: YES), It is determined whether it is the release timing (step S3504). If a delay period has occurred due to the start timing of the time-based effect being produced in the situation where the effect for the game effect is being executed, the effect for the game effect is ended and the effect for a new game effect It is determined that it is the delay cancellation timing when either is started or the demonstration display is started. In addition, when a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect being produced in the situation where the effect for the open / close execution mode is being executed, the effect for the open / close execution mode is ended and a new game is performed. It is determined that it is the delay cancellation timing when the effect for circulation is started or the demonstration display is started.

  If it is the delay cancellation timing (step S3504: YES), the in-delay flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3505), and "1" is set in the preparation display flag in the RAM 64 (step S3506). Thereafter, a duration for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3507). This time is a case where the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time-matching presentation, the remaining period until the start timing of the special period is the continuation period of the preparation display. Then, information corresponding to the duration for preparation display calculated in step S3507 is set as the preparation display start command read from the sound light side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparation display start command is displayed on the display CPU 201 It transmits (step S3509). As a result, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 already described in the command handling process (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201 is executed to count the remaining time notification image G63 in the remaining period of the preparation period as already described. The value is displayed by subtracting from the fixed start value to the fixed end value.

  Note that the processing content of step S3510 to step S3513 is the same as the processing content of step S3008 to step S3011 in the setting processing (FIG. 81) during the preparation period in the above embodiment.

  As described above, in the situation where the presentation for the game run or the presentation for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, when the time-based presentation start timing comes, for the presentation or the opening / closing execution mode for the game circulation during its execution The display of the image for the preparation period, including the remaining time notification image G63, is not started until the effect of S is finished. Thereby, the display of the image for the preparation period is suddenly started, for example, in a situation where the expectation for the jackpot result being increased by the predetermined reach effect being executed is suddenly started, and to the predetermined reach effect. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the player's attention level decreases.

  In addition, until display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect for the game circulation during execution or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode ends in this way, When the effect for the game run or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is ended and the display of the image for the preparation period is started, the count value of the remaining time notification image G63 in relation to the remaining duration of the preparation period. An update cycle is set. Thereby, even when the display of the image for the preparation period is started at the timing after the start timing of the time-based effect presentation, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is fixed from the fixed start value. It can be done until the end value is reached.

<Configuration for performing different preservation effects>
Next, a configuration for performing another storage effect will be described.

  The separate storage effect is stored as drawing data created by projecting three-dimensional image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane as separate storage data, and thereafter the other stored data The drawing data is created by projecting another stored data onto a virtual two-dimensional plane together with other image data arranged in the world coordinate system by setting the object as the plate-like object data. It is an effect that displays an image by doing. In addition, during a period in which an image is displayed using drawing data created based on arranging the separately stored data in the world coordinate system, the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane when creating the separately stored data Mask control is performed on the three-dimensional image data that has become a target of projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. The image data that has been excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane in mask control may not be arranged in the world coordinate system, and updating of the arrangement position, shape, etc. of those arranged in the world coordinate system is performed It may be further excluded from the projection target without being By executing drawing data creation using separate stored data and mask control as described above, the processing load on VDP 205 can be reduced even when the types of images to be displayed increase. It becomes.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for describing the specific contents of the separate storage effect, and FIGS. 88 (a1) and 88 (b1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system. 88 (a2) and 88 (b2) show the contents of an image displayed using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

  In the situation where the separate storage effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 88 (a1), the image data 241 on the rearmost side is disposed at the farthest position with reference to the viewpoint PC11, and The image data 242 for one background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged, and further, the image data 244 for effect character is arranged on the front side. The backmost image data 241 is image data in which the texture data for the backmost is pasted on the plate-like object data (i.e., plate polygon). The plate-like object data is non-thick object data, and has a smaller data capacity and less processing load in geometry calculation and rendering in the VDP 205 as compared to thick three-dimensional object data.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a2), the projection onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is performed in the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88 (a1) to create the drawing data. It becomes possible to display such an image for one frame on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the backmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 is displayed further in front of it. Then, between the update timings of the plurality of images, the arrangement position and shape of the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character in the world coordinate system By changing the above, it is possible to change the display position, the shape, and the like of the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 in an image of one frame.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a1), when the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data for the second background individual image By making the projection data on the virtual two-dimensional plane such that the image data 244 for the effect character is not a projection target while making the 243 a projection target, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and It becomes possible to create two-dimensional drawing data enabling display of a still image of the second background individual image G73 as first separate storage data. The first separate stored data is attached to the plate-like polygon data to be arranged in the world coordinate system as the first separate stored image data 245, and the image data 244 for the effect character in front of it and the image for the additional individual image By arranging the data 246, the state shown in FIG. 88 (b1) is obtained. Then, in this state, the first stored image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are projected on a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image of one frame as shown in FIG. 88 (b2) on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are further in front of it. Is displayed.

  However, since the image data for displaying the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is arranged as a still image in the world coordinate system using the first separate stored image data 245, The arrangement position, the shape, and the like of the first background separate image G72 and the second background separate image G73 can not be individually changed between update timings. On the other hand, the image data for displaying the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are individually arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. It is possible to individually change the arrangement position, the shape, and the like of the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between the update timings of the images.

  As described above, in the case where drawing data is created using the first separate stored image data 245, the first separate stored image data 245 is the outermost surface when the first separate stored data is created in the world coordinate system. The image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged on the front side with respect to the positions at which they were arranged. The space MS1 on the back side of the first separate stored image data 245 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. Thus, when drawing data is created using the first separate stored image data 245, a virtual two-dimensional image is displayed to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. The number of image data to be projected onto a plane decreases, and the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the images G71 to G73 decreases. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  The execution of the mask control excludes the image data 241 on the back surface, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in the situation, parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information on the image data 241 to 243 is stored and held in the work RAM 202. As a result, when returning to a period for displaying an image by projecting the image data 241 to 243 on a virtual two-dimensional plane, an area for updating parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 is secured in the work RAM 202 There is no need to execute processing to In order to newly set parameter information of image data as an update target, initial processing such as search processing of a storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of a storage area searched by the search processing The setting process needs to be performed, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 which is the target of mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the processing load on the display CPU 201 is extremely large when the mask control is canceled. It is possible to prevent it from

  Further, even if the display CPU 201 executes the mask control and the image data 241 to 243 are excluded from the objects to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane, the image data for the first background individual image The process of updating parameter information on the image data 243 for the second background individual image 242 is continued. Thereby, immediately after the end of the period in which the display of the image using the first separate stored image data 245 is finished, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed from the state immediately before the start of the period. The first background individual image from the state in which the change in movement is continued according to the display pattern up to that time with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period, instead of the movement being resumed It is possible to resume the movement of G72 and the second background individual image G73.

  In addition, the execution of mask control excludes the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, the buffer area in which the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system in the VRAM 204 is held. Thereby, when returning to the period which displays an image by projecting these image data 241-243 on a virtual two-dimensional plane, the information referred to arrange | position these image data 241-243 in a world coordinate system is used. There is no need to execute processing for securing the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a search process of the storage area of the VRAM 204 and a clear process of the storage area searched by the search process. By holding the buffer area of the image data 241 to 243 as it is in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

  Here, in a situation where mask control is being performed, when it is necessary to create separate storage data using image data excluded from the projection target by the mask control, the image data is excluded from the projection target. Therefore, it is impossible to create separate storage data using the image data. The case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c). 89 (a1) to 89 (c1) show three-dimensional image data arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 89 (a2) to 89 (c2) project on a virtual two-dimensional plane. Shows the contents of the image displayed using the drawing data created in.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a1), the backmost image data 241 is disposed at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are placed in front of it. The image data 243 of the image data is arranged, and the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged further to the front side, and projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed to create drawing data, as shown in FIG. It is possible to display an image of one frame as shown in (a2) on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of each of the image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89 (a1) is stored as the second separate storage data.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (b1), the second separate stored data is pasted to the plate-like polygon data to arrange the second separate stored image data 247 as a second separate stored image data 247 in the world coordinate system. The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the stored image data 247. Then, projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed on the second classified stored image data 247 and the effect image data 248 to create drawing data, whereby one frame as shown in FIG. 89 (b2) is generated. Can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. The effect image data 248 is data in which the texture data for the effect image is pasted to the plate-like polygon data, and the effect image data 248 is set to the transparent or semitransparent α value as a whole and is opaque. Is not set, the effect image data 248 is overwritten on the second separately stored image data 247 in a state in which the transparency processing or the semitransparent processing is performed.

  As described above, when drawing data is created using the second separately stored image data 247, the second separately stored image data 247 is the backmost surface when the second separately stored data is created in the world coordinate system. The image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are arranged in front of the positions at which they were arranged. Then, the space MS2 on the back side of the second separately stored image data 247 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. Thus, when drawing data is created using the second separate stored image data 247, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 are displayed. As a result, the number of image data to be projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane decreases, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the images G71 to G74 decreases. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  However, immediately after the display of the image using the second classified stored image data 247 is performed, the first classified stored image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image as shown in FIG. 88 (b1) When it is necessary to display an image using the image data 246 for the second image, while the display of the image using the second separate stored image data 247 is being performed, the backmost image data 241, the first background Since mask control is performed on the image data 242 for the individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the first separately stored image data 245 can not be created. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (c1), the first separate stored image data 245 can not be arranged on the back side of the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system. As shown in FIG. 88 (c2), the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed in the state where the background image is not displayed. Further, for example, not only the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system, but also the image data 241 on the rearmost side, the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image If drawing data is to be created by arranging the image data 243 for use and projecting all the image data 241 to 244 and 246 on a virtual two-dimensional plane, the processing load of the VDP 205 will be large. In the case where such a situation occurs, in the pachinko machine 10, when the operation device for effect 48 is operated, an operation-responsive effect occurs in which an image is displayed using the second separate stored image data 247. There is a case where it is necessary to display an image using the first separate stored image data 245 immediately after the operation corresponding to the operation is finished in the configuration.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display an image using the first separate storage image data 245 immediately after the display of the image using the second separate storage image data 247 is being performed. It is a structure. Hereinafter, the manner in which the separate storage effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a time chart showing how a different storage effect is performed. FIG. 90 (a) shows a normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed, and FIG. 90 (b) shows a mask control period in which mask control is performed. FIG. 90 (c) shows a timing at which another storage of at least one of the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data is executed, and FIG. 90 (d) shows the first separate storage data provided in the VRAM 204. 90 (e) shows a period during which the second separate storage buffer 252 is provided with the second separate storage buffer 252, and FIG. 90 (e) shows a period during which the second separate storage buffer 252 is provided. FIG. 90 (f) shows the operation effective period of the operation device 48 for effect, FIG. 90 (g) shows the operation timing of the operation device 48 for effect, and FIG. 90 (h) shows the execution period of the operation corresponding to operation.

  First, the case of displaying an image using the first separate stored image data 245 will be described.

  In the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the storage execution timing of the first separate stored data is reached at timing t1 as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 88A and 88B, the first separate storage data is created, and the first separate storage data is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204. As a result, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the first separately stored image data 245 is stored and held in the first separately stored buffer 251 at the timing of t1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, a period in which an image using the first separate stored image data 245 is displayed is a period in which mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). . In this case, even in the period in which the mask control is performed, the image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed in the first separate stored image data 245 are handled. The various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 to be stored is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, when the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 is ended, as shown in FIGS. 90A and 90B, the mask control is ended. It returns to the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, even if it is the mask control period as described above, the display CPU 201 of various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 respectively. Since the update process in is continued, the display of the images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control is started.

  Next, a case where an image is displayed using the first separate stored image data 245 immediately after the display of an image using the second separate stored image data 247 is performed will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (c) will be appropriately referred to. 91 (a) to 91 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how an image is displayed using the first separate storage image data 245 and an image is displayed using the second separate storage image data 247. 91 (a1) to 91 (c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 91 (a2) to 91 (c2) project on a virtual two-dimensional plane. The contents of the image displayed by using the drawing data created by

  In a normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), it becomes the start timing of the operation effective period of the operation device for effect 48 as shown in FIG. 90 (f) at timing t4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), separate storage is performed at the timing of t4. At the execution timing of the separate storage, it is both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data that are targets of the separate storage.

  A state in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are created will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). As shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the backmost image data 241 is disposed at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are placed in front of it. Image data 243 and the image data 244 for the effect character are further placed on the near side, and projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed to create drawing data, as shown in FIG. 91. It is possible to display an image of one frame as shown in (a2) on the symbol display device 41. In this case, drawing data created with all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91 (a1) being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 as second separate storage data. Ru. The second separate storage data is data enabling display of still images of the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74.

  In the state where three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the second background individual image While the image data 243 is to be projected, the projection process to a virtual two-dimensional plane is executed so that the image data 244 for the effect character is not to be projected, the backmost image G71, the first background individual Two-dimensional drawing data capable of displaying still images of the image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is created as first separate storage data. Then, the first separate storage data is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251.

  Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 90, the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are created at the timing of t4, whereby the first separate storage buffer 251 is firstly stored as shown in FIG. 90 (d). The separately stored data is stored and held, and as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the second separately stored data is stored and held in the second separately stored buffer 252.

  Thereafter, at time t5, as shown in FIG. 90 (g), the operation device for effect 48 is operated, whereby an operation corresponding effect is started as shown in FIG. 90 (h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (b1), the second separate stored data is attached to the plate-like polygon data and arranged as the second separate stored image data 247 in the world coordinate system. The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is disposed in front of the stored image data 247. Then, projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed on the second classified stored image data 247 and the effect image data 248 to create drawing data, whereby one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (b2) is generated. Can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the operation corresponding presentation is started at the timing of t5, it becomes a period in which the mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b) at the timing t5. In this case, even when the mask control is performed, the backmost image G71 to be displayed in the second separate stored image data 247, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image The various parameter information of the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to G74 is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (h), the operation corresponding rendering is finished at the timing of t6. In this case, display of an image using the first separate stored image data 245 is started at the timing of the time t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (c1), the first separate stored data is attached to the plate-like polygon data and arranged in the world coordinate system as the first separate stored image data 245, and for the effect character in front of it. Image data 244 and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are arranged. Then, in this state, the first stored image data 245, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are projected on a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data. This makes it possible to display an image of one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (c2) on the symbol display device 41. In this case, as described above, the updating process in the display CPU 201 of the parameter information for the image data 244 for the effect character is continued even during the mask control period, so mask control of the display of the effect character image G74 is started The display mode starts from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing.

  When the display of the image using the first separate stored image data 245 is started at the timing of t6, the mask control is continued as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). However, the target of mask control is the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73, respectively, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual The image data 244, 246 corresponding to the image G75 is not a target of mask control. The various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 to be subjected to mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. Ru.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, when the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 is ended, as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b), the mask control is ended, It returns to the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, even if it is the mask control period as described above, the display CPU 201 of various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 respectively. Since the update process in is continued, the display of the images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control is started. As a result, it is possible to match the effect contents between the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 and the like.

  Next, although both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are separately stored, the first separate storage image data 245 is used without displaying an image using the second separate storage image data 247. The case where the displayed image is displayed will be described.

  In the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the operation valid period of the effect operating device 48 becomes the start timing as shown in FIG. 90 (f) at the timing of t8. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 90C, it becomes the execution timing of the separate storage for both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the first separate storage data is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251, and as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the second separate storage buffer 252 2) Separately stored data is stored and held.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 90F and 90G, at the timing of t9, the operation effective period passes without the operation device 48 for effect being operated. In this case, since the display of the image using the second separate stored image data 247 is not performed, the mask control is not executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the first separate stored data to be used thereafter is created again. That is, the first separate storage data created at the timing of t8 and stored in the first separate storage buffer 251 is erased, and the first separate storage data created at the timing of t9 is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251. It is newly kept in memory. Thus, it is possible to display each of images G71 to G73 in a display mode having a timing closer to the timing of using the first separate stored image data 245 as an image using the first separate stored image data 245. Become. The timing at which the first separate stored data is newly created is the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image whose operation valid period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, at time t10, display of an image using the first separate stored image data 245 is started, whereby mask control is started as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). However, the target of mask control is the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73, respectively, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual The image data 244, 246 corresponding to the image G75 is not a target of mask control. The various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 to be subjected to mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. Ru.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, when the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 is ended, the mask control is ended as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b), It returns to the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed. In this case, even if it is the mask control period as described above, the display CPU 201 of various parameter information on the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 respectively. Since the update process in is continued, the display of the images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control is started. As a result, it is possible to match the effect contents between the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 and the like.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing another storage effect will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for another storage effect executed by the display CPU 201. It should be noted that the calculation process for the separate storage effect is executed in the background calculation process of step S2503 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game cycle in which the separate storage effect is to be executed.

  First, by updating the pointer information to be referred to in the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 to control the presentation for the current game, the content of the data to be referred to in the execution target table is Data corresponding to the number of times of processing (step S3601). After that, when neither of the execution of the operation corresponding presentation and the operation effective period is any (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether it is the utilization period of the first separate storage data (step S3604). If the usage period of the first separate storage data is a game cycle in which no operation effective period occurs and is a game cycle in which another storage effect occurs, it occurs when the elapsed time of the game cycle has reached a predetermined time. In the case of a game session in which an operation valid period occurs, this occurs when the operation valid period elapses without the operation corresponding effect being executed or when the operation corresponding effect is ended.

  If it is not the usage period of the first separate stored data (step S3604: NO), the image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character. Thereafter, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image The derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the respective image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3606 and S3607). Thereafter, non-use instruction information of another storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). If it is the creation timing of the first separate storage data (step S3609: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separate storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

  As described above, when the calculation processing for the separate storage effect is executed, the various types of image data 241 to 244 obtained in step S3605 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). Are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. Further, non-use instruction information of another storage data is set in the drawing list, and when the current time is the creation timing of the first other storage data, first creation instruction information of the other storage data is set.

  If it is during the use period of the first separate storage data in the calculation processing for the separate storage effect (step S3604: YES), based on the currently set execution target table, the image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing It grasps (step S3611-step S3613). The image data includes the first separate storage data stored in the first separate storage buffer 251, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. After that, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the image data 246 for the additional individual image and the first The parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the separately stored data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with each of the image data 241 to 244 and 246 (steps S3614 to S3617) . In this case, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be placed in the world coordinate system, but these image data 241 to 244, Storage of parameter information in the work RAM 202 for 246 and updating of the parameter information is continued. Thereafter, usage instruction information of another storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

  As described above, when the calculation processing for the separate storage effect is executed, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407), the various image data grasped in step S3611 to step S3613 241 to 244 and 246 are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 and 246 is set in the drawing list. Further, usage indication information of another storage data is set in the drawing list.

  In the calculation processing for separate storage effect, when it is the operation effective period (step S3603: YES), the processing during the operation effective period is executed in step S3618, and when the operation corresponding effect is in progress (step S3602: YES), and in step S3619, an operation corresponding rendering process is executed. The processing during the effective period of the operation and the processing during the effect corresponding to the operation will be described below.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing processing during the operation valid period.

  If it is the start timing of the operation effective period (step S3701: YES), the second creation instruction information of another storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). If the process of step S3702 is executed, or if the effect operation device 48 is not operated and the start timing of the operation effective period is not operated (step S3701 and step S3703: NO), based on the execution target table currently set. The image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S3704). The image data includes the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character. Thereafter, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image The derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the respective image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3705 and S3706). Thereafter, the valid period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). If it is the end timing of the operation valid period (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of another storage data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

  As described above, when the processing during the operation valid period is executed, various image data 241 to 244 obtained in step S3704 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). It is set as a placement target in the coordinate system. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, validity period information is set in the drawing list, and if the current time is the start timing of the operation valid period, the second creation instruction information of another stored data is set, and this time is the end timing of the operation valid period. For example, the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set.

  When the operation device for effect 48 is operated in the processing during the operation valid period (step S3703: YES), the image data of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the execution target table currently set (step S3710 and step S3711). The image data includes second separate storage data and effect image data 248 stored in the second separate storage buffer 252. Thereafter, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248 and the second separately stored data. The parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the respective image data 241 to 244, 248 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3712 to S3715). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. Storage and retention of parameter information of the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and update of the parameter information are continued. After that, the operation corresponding rendering information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

  As described above, when the calculation processing for the separate storage effect is executed, the various image data grasped in step S3710 and step S3711 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). H.248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. Further, operation corresponding rendering information is set in the drawing list.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an operation corresponding rendering process.

  First, image data of a type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (steps S3801 and S3802). The image data includes second separate storage data and effect image data 248 stored in the second separate storage buffer 252. Thereafter, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248 and the second separately stored data. The parameter information is calculated and derived for each of them, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data 241 to 244, 248 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3803 to S3806). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. Storage and retention of parameter information of the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and update of the parameter information are continued. Thereafter, the operation corresponding rendering information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

  As described above, when the calculation processing for the separate storage effect is executed, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407), the various image data grasped in step S3801 and step S3802 H.248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Further, parameter information to be applied to the image data 248 is set in the drawing list. Further, operation corresponding rendering information is set in the drawing list.

  Next, setting processing for separate storage display performed in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for separately storing and displaying is executed as a part of the setting process for background performed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). In addition, when non-use instruction information of separately stored data, use instruction information of separately stored data, valid period information, or operation response effect information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for separately stored display is executed.

  When use indication information of another storage data is not set in the present drawing list, and further, operation corresponding rendering information is not set in the present drawing list (step S3901: NO), based on the present drawing list, The image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are grasped as an arrangement target on the world coordinate system (step S3902) . In addition, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3903). Then, in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the image data 241 to 244 to be arranged, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed (step S3904). As a result, an image of one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (a2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If use indication information of another storage data is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: YES), based on the current drawing list, the first separate storage data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image The image data 246 is recognized as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system (steps S3906 to S3908). In addition, parameter information to be applied to the first classified data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3909). Then, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the first classified data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image (step S3904). As a result, an image of one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (c2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the operation corresponding rendering information is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: NO), the second separate stored data and the effect image data 248 are grasped as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the current drawing list. (Step S3910 and step S3911). In addition, the parameter information to be applied to the second classified data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3912). Then, in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the second classified data and the effect image data 248, a setting process to the world coordinate system is executed (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (b2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, drawing data creation processing for separate storage display performed in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The drawing data creation processing for separate storage display is executed as a part of rendering data creation processing for effect and background performed in step S2610 of the drawing processing (FIG. 70). Further, when non-use instruction information of another storage data, use instruction information of another storage data, valid period information or operation-performing effect information is set in the drawing list, a drawing data creation process for another storage display is executed. Ru.

  When the first creation instruction information of the separate storage data or the second creation instruction information of the separate storage data is set in the drawing list this time (step S4001: YES), the backmost image data 241 for the first background individual image The first separate storage data is created by projecting the image data 242 of and the image data 243 for the second background individual image on a virtual two-dimensional plane (step S4002). Then, the created first separate storage data is written to the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4001 or if the process of step S4002 is performed, drawing data for displaying an image of any of FIGS. 91 (a2), 91 (b2) and 91 (c2) is created. (Step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data combining process of step S2612 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) to display an image of one frame.

  Thereafter, when the second creation instruction information of another storage data is set in the current drawing list (step S4005: YES), the drawing data created in the immediately preceding step S4004 is set as the second separate storage data, and the second VRAM 204 is used. It writes in the separate storage buffer 252 (step S4006). As a result, the second separate storage data is stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252. Further, since the drawing data used to display an image of one frame is used as it is as the second separate stored data, the processing load for creating the second separate stored data can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the case of displaying an image using the first separate storage data, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while executing the mask control. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is reduced, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205. When displaying an image using the second separate storage data, the image data 241 on the back, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the effect character It is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 while performing mask control on the image data 244 for image. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 is reduced, and the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target. Even if this is done, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  The parameter information of the image data excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control is stored and held without being deleted from the work RAM 202. Thereby, when returning to a period for displaying an image by projecting the image data on a virtual two-dimensional plane, processing for securing an area for updating parameter information of the image data in the work RAM 202 is executed. There is no need to In order to newly set parameter information of image data as an update target, initial processing such as search processing of a storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of a storage area searched by the search processing The setting process needs to be performed, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, when the parameter information of the image data that is the target of mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, the processing load on the display CPU 201 when the mask control is canceled becomes extremely large. It is possible to prevent that.

  In addition, even if the display CPU 201 is in a situation where predetermined image data is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing mask control, the process of updating parameter information for the predetermined image data is performed. continue. Thereby, immediately after the end of the period in which the display of the image using the first separate storage data or the second separate storage data is completed, the movement of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data from the state immediately before the start of the period To the predetermined image data from the state where the change in movement is continued according to the display pattern up to that time with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period, rather than being resumed. It is possible to resume the movement of the corresponding image. As a result, it is possible to match the effect contents between the effect execution device other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 and the like.

  In addition, the execution of mask control excludes the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, the buffer area in which the information referred to for arranging the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system in the VRAM 204 is held. Thereby, when returning to the period which displays an image by projecting these image data 241-243 on a virtual two-dimensional plane, the information referred to arrange | position these image data 241-243 in a world coordinate system is used. There is no need to execute processing for securing the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a search process of the storage area of the VRAM 204 and a clear process of the storage area searched by the search process. By holding the buffer area of the image data 241 to 243 as it is in the VRAM 204, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

  If an image display period using the first separate storage data may occur immediately after the end of the image display period using the second separate storage data, an image using the second separate storage data is displayed. Not only the second separate storage data but also the first separate storage data is created before the start of the period. As a result, even if the mask control is performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data in a period in which the image using the second separate storage data is displayed, the second separate Immediately after the period for displaying the image using the storage data ends, it is possible to display the image using the first separate storage data.

  Also, even if the first separate storage data is created before the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is started, the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is When mask control is not performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate stored data due to no occurrence, the first image display using the first separate stored data is started immediately before the start of the display of the image. 1) Creation of separately stored data is newly performed. This makes it possible to display the images G71 to G73 according to the display mode having a timing closer to the timing of using the first separate stored data as an image using the first separate stored data.

<Another form of another preservation effect>
· Instead of a configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored when the operation valid period starts, the first separate stored data at a predetermined timing before the operation valid period starts And one of the second separate storage data is stored, and the other separate storage data is stored after the predetermined timing and before the start of the operation effective period or at the start timing of the operation effective period. It may be configured to be held. In this case, the processing load can be distributed as compared with a configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored and held in the same processing cycle.

  · When mask control is being performed, image data for which mask control is to be performed is not arranged in the world coordinate system, and image data for which mask control is to be performed is also the world coordinate system It may be configured to be excluded from the objects to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane that are arranged in. In this case, there is no need to execute processing for re-arranging the image data that has been the target of mask control execution in the world coordinate system when mask control is completed. In addition, with regard to the image data that is the target of mask control in the configuration, the parameter information to be applied to the image data may not be changed in the VDP 205 although it is the placement target in the world coordinate system. However, it is preferable that updating of parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201 be continued.

  -Instead of the configuration in which updating of parameter information for image data to be subjected to mask control is continued by the display CPU 201, updating of parameter information on the display CPU 201 is possible for image data to be subjected to mask control The configuration may not be performed. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data which has been the target of mask control is resumed from the display state of the image corresponding to the other storage data. Even in this configuration, it is preferable that the configuration in which the parameter information to be the target of the mask control is stored in the work RAM 202 be stored and held during execution of the mask control.

  The separately stored data stored separately in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In addition, the configuration of the mask control may be applied to a configuration in which another type of stored data is one type.

<Configuration for performing angle display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing angle display effect will be described.

  The angle display effect uses a plurality of types of moving pictures that can be displayed while viewing the display objects whose movements change with time as viewed from different angles, and used until then based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect It is an effect of changing the target of use to a moving image of an angle different from the target moving image. Specific display contents of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIG. 97 (a) and FIG. 97 (b). As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), in the angle display effect, a photographed image is displayed as a moving image. In this photographed image, a person is displayed as a photographed character image G81, and the movement of the photographed character image G81 is displayed as a moving image. Further, FIG. 97 (a) corresponds to a moving image obtained by capturing an image of a person of the photographed character image G81 from the A angle which is a predetermined angle with respect to the photographed character image G81, and FIG. 97 (b) is different from the A angle. It corresponds to a moving image obtained by imaging a person of the photographed character image G81 from an angle. Other than the A-angle moving image and the B-angle moving image, there is also a moving image obtained by capturing a person of the photographed character image G81 from the C-angle different from the A-angle and the B-angle.

  The contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 203 to execute angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  The first moving image data group 261 of A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of A angle, and A as moving image data for displaying moving image of A angle as data for executing angle display effect. An angle third moving image data group 263 is stored in advance. Further, the memory module 203 displays a first moving image data group B of B angle, a second moving image data group 265 of B angle, and a third moving image data group 266 of B angle as moving image data for displaying moving images of B angle. Is stored in advance. The memory module 203 further includes a first C-angle video data group 267, a C-angle second video data group 268, and a C-angle third video data group 269 as moving image data for displaying a C-angle moving image. Is stored in advance.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each moving image data group 261 to 269. FIG. 99 (a) shows a first moving image data group 261 of A angle, and FIG. 99 (b) shows a second moving image of A angle. FIG. 99 (c) shows a third moving image data group 263 of A-angle, FIG. 99 (d) shows a first moving image data group 264 of B-angle, and FIG. 99 (e) shows a B angle. 99 (f) shows a third moving image data group 266 of B-angle, FIG. 99 (g) shows a first moving image data group 267 of C-angle, FIG. Shows a second moving image data group 268 of C angle, and FIG. 99 (i) shows a third moving image data group 269 of C angle.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (i), each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image data 271a to 273c are, for example, image data encoded according to the MPEG2 system, with interframe compression so as to have a plurality of difference data based on still image data for one frame as described above. . When the moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded, the moving image data 271a to 273c is expanded into still image data of a plurality of frames.

  The amount of one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is such that still image data for the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Is set. Specifically, with respect to still image data for the minimum unit number, each of the moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, 48 image updates (48 frame updates) are possible. It has become. Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20) of such moving image data 271 a to 273 c.

  The first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle all correspond to the A angle in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. It is for displaying a series of animations of the appearance seen at an angle. A series of moving images as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 271 a to 271 c in each moving image data group 261 to 263 of the A angle. In this case, in each moving image data group 261 to 263 of A angle, still image data of the final order in moving image data 271a to 271c in which the order to be decoded becomes the predetermined order and the next for the predetermined order The still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271a to 271c to be the order has continuity of the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined movement pattern. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 271 a included in the first moving image data group 261 of the A-angle in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the manner in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to the predetermined motion pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. In addition, in the case of the second moving image data group 262 of A-angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 of the A-angle in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the manner in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to the predetermined motion pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle. Further, in the case of the third moving image data group 263 of A-angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 271 c included in the third moving image data group 263 of A-angle according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the manner in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to the predetermined motion pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle.

  The B-angle first moving image data group 264, the B-angle second moving image data group 265, and the B-angle third moving image data group 266 all correspond to the B angle in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. It is for displaying a series of animations of the appearance seen at an angle. A series of moving images as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in each moving image data group 264 to 266 of B angle. In this case, in each moving image data group 264 to 266 of B angle, still image data in the final order in moving image data 272a to 272c in which the order to be decoded becomes the predetermined order and the next for the predetermined order The still image data of the first order in the moving image data 272a to 272c to be the order has continuity of the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined movement pattern. Therefore, in the case of the B-angle first moving image data group 264, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 272a included in the B-angle first moving image data group 264 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the manner in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to the predetermined motion pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In addition, in the case of the second moving image data group 265 of B angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 272 b included in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle according to a predetermined decoding order As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the manner in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to the predetermined motion pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In addition, in the case of the third moving image data group B of B angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 272 c included in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle according to a predetermined decoding order As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the manner in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to the predetermined motion pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle.

  The C-angle first moving image data group 267, the C-angle second moving image data group 268, and the C-angle third moving image data group 269 correspond to the C angle in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern It is for displaying a series of animations of the appearance seen at an angle. A series of moving images as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273 a to 273 c in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of C angle. In this case, in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of C angle, still image data in the final order in moving image data 273a to 273c in which the order to be decoded becomes the predetermined order and the next for the predetermined order The still image data of the first order in the moving image data 273a to 273c to be the order has continuity of the movement of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined movement pattern. Therefore, in the case of the C-angle first moving image data group 267, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 273a included in the first C-angle first moving image data group 267 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions of the actual photographed character image G81 moving according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle second moving image data group 268, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 273b included in the second C moving-image data group 268 according to a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions of the actual photographed character image G81 moving according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In addition, in the case of the third moving image data group 269 of C angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding moving image data 273 c included in the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle according to a predetermined decoding order As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions of the actual photographed character image G81 moving according to a predetermined movement pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle.

  Since the moving image data 271a to 273c is to derive still image data by executing the decoding process, it is not possible to start the display of the image from the timing in the middle of the moving image data 271a to 273c. When the display of the image is started from the middle of the data 271a to 273c, the processing waiting time occurs until the still image data of the middle of the data is derived. In this case, since each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271 a to 273 c, moving image data 271 a to 273 c in a predetermined order and moving image data 271 a to 273 c in the next order It is possible to use the switching timing of as an angle changing timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the type of angle among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle during execution of the angle display effect.

  Here, in the angle display effect, the change trigger of the angle is generated by the operation of the operation device 48 for effect. In this case, if the change of the angle does not occur early with respect to the operation timing of the operation device for effect 48, it is difficult for the player to give an impression that the angle is changed by the operation of the operation device for effect 48 as a trigger. I will. On the other hand, as described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image exist in each of the angles A to C, specifically, three. Furthermore, the number of times of update of the image (number of frames) after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data of the first order in the arbitrary moving image data 271a to 273c is between the moving image data groups 261 to 269 within the same angle. It is different.

  Specifically, in each of the angles A to C, the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 is the first still image data in the first moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a to start the angle display effect The moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a corresponding to the timing are still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the previous order. It corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by a few minutes corresponding to the minimum number of units. In this case, the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, and the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle have the same number of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a. The number of times of update of the image after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the mutually corresponding order is the same.

  In each of the angles A to C, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is the first moving image of each angle in the first to fourth still image data in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in each order. With respect to still image data of the first order in moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order in data groups 261, 264, 267, corresponding to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses by the first reference period K1 There is. In other words, at each angle of A to C, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is the first moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the first moving image data is the start timing of the angle display effect The moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the subsequent order corresponds to the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the previous order. This corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by a number corresponding to the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, each moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is a moving image included in the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. As the data 271a, 272a, 273a, the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order and the content of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. Are included in the still image data created by the two continuous moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in.

  In each of the angles A to C, the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is the second moving image of each angle of A to C in the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271 c, 272 c, 273 c of each order. With respect to still image data of the first order in moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the corresponding order in data groups 262, 265, 268, corresponding to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses by the second reference period K1 There is. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is the first order still image data in the first moving image data 271 c, 272 c, 273 c is the angle display effect start timing Against the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the second reference period K2 equivalent to twice the first reference period K1, while the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c of the subsequent order is the previous order This corresponds to the timing at which the display of moving images has progressed by a number corresponding to the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c. In this case, the moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 are moving images included in the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. The data 271a, 272a, 273a, and the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order and the content of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap, and at the same angle, the second moving image data The moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the groups 262, 265, 268, and the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the corresponding order and the content of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap doing. Furthermore, all the still image data created by one moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. The two consecutive moving images included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268, which are included in the still image data created by the two consecutive moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in It is included in still image data created by the image data 271b, 272b, and 273b.

  The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16.

  The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 32.

  As described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image on each angle of A to C are provided. In each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267. The third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268, while being shifted by the first reference period K1 corresponding to The first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of data units is shifted. This makes it possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in the predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle, and the operation timing of the operation device 48 for effect is generated. It is possible to change the angle early.

  Next, the progress of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 100 (a) shows the operation timing of the operation device for effect 48, FIG. 100 (b) shows the waiting period until the angle is switched with respect to the operation of the operation device 48 for effect, and FIG. FIG. 100 (d) shows a period in which a moving image of A-angle is displayed, and FIG. 100 (e) shows one of the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of A-angle. 100 (f) shows a period in which a B-angle moving image is displayed, and FIG. 100 (g) shows a period in which moving image data 271a to 271c are read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. From the memory module 203 to the VRAM 20, one moving image data 272a to 272c included in the B angle moving image data group 264 to 266. Indicate the period during which the are read deployed buffer 211. In the following description, the case of changing from the A angle to the B angle will be described, but the same applies to other patterns of changing the angle.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (d), as shown in FIG. 100 (c), in the situation where the display of a moving image using the first moving image data group 261 among the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of A-angle A switchable timing to the second moving image data group 265 of B angle occurs at the timing of t1, and a switchable timing to the third moving image data group 266 of B angle occurs at the timing of t2. However, since the effect operating device 48 has not been operated by the timing of t1 and the timing of t2, switching of the angle does not occur.

  The switching of the angle triggered by the operation of the effect operating device 48 is performed by looping in a predetermined order among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. Specifically, at the start timing of the angle display effect, the A angle is selected, and thereafter, triggered by the operation of the operation device 48 for effect A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → B angle → C angle → A Angle switching occurs in the order of angle →.

  Thereafter, at timing t3, the next moving image data 271a is read out and decoded in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle which is the target of moving image display. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), moving image data 271a in the next order is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 Decoding of the image data 271a is started. In this case, only one moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the decoding process is started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written to the moving image data area 211b. In addition, at the time of reading and decoding processing of the one moving image data 271a, the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a to be displayed at present is not erased. Setting of data is performed.

  Thereafter, at timing t4 when the decoding process is completed, a switchable timing to the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle occurs as shown in FIG. 100 (c). However, since the operation device for effect 48 is not operated by the timing of t4, switching of the angle does not occur, and the moving image of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t4. The display of the moving image using the data 271a is started.

  Thereafter, at time t5, the effect operating device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 100 (a). In this case, since the moving image of the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed and it is not the switching timing to the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle, as shown in FIG. 100 (b) The switching of is waiting for.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, with respect to the timing of t7 which is the switchable timing to the moving image data group 264 of B angle, a period of time which enables decoding of one moving image data 271a to 273c This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 100 (g), decoding of moving image data 272b of the switching destination is started in the second moving image data group 265 of B-angle. Specifically, moving image data 272b of the current switching destination is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the second moving image data group 265 of B-angle, and the moving image data 272b is decoded. It is started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written to the moving image data area 211b. In addition, at the time of the reading and decoding processing of the one moving image data 272b, the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a to be displayed at present is not erased. Setting of data is performed. Note that the period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period in which moving image display is performed by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c. For example, the decode startable timing is switched immediately thereafter. This corresponds to the image update timing two times earlier than the possible timing.

  Thereafter, at timing t7 when the decoding process is completed, display of a moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing t7 is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), a switchable timing to the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle occurs at the timing of t8. However, since the operation device for effect 48 is not operated by the timing of t8, the switching of the angle does not occur, and the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle for which the decoding is completed at the timing of t7. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b is continued.

  As described above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the operation device for effect 48, but the operation timing of the operation device for effect 48 is the operation timing at that operation timing to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c of the switching destination Even if it is started, if the decoding process is not completed by the next angle switchable timing, the angle switch is not performed at the next angle switchable timing, and the next angle switchable timing is also performed. At the angle switching is performed. The operation will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (d), in the situation where the display of the moving image using the first moving image data group 261 among the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of A-angle is being performed, FIG. As shown, the effect operating device 48 is operated. In this case, since the moving image of the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed and it is not the switching timing to the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle, as shown in FIG. 100 (b) The switching of is waiting for.

  Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 100C, it becomes the switchable timing to the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle. However, one moving image data 271a to 273 are in a period between the timing of t9 when the operation device for effect 48 is operated and the timing of t10 which is a switchable timing to the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of B angle. 273c is less than the time required to complete the decoding process. Therefore, switching to the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle does not occur at the timing of t10. At the timing of t10, the process of reading out and decoding the moving image data 272a to 272c of the B angle has not yet started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, with respect to the timing of t12 which is the switchable timing to the moving image data group 264 of B angle, a period of time which enables decoding of one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 100 (g), decoding of moving image data 272c of the switching destination in the third moving image data group 266 of B angle is started. Specifically, moving image data 272c of the current switching destination is read from memory module 203 to moving image data area 211b in B-angle third moving image data group 266, and the moving image data 272c is decoded. It is started. Then, the plurality of still image data after the decoding process is written to the moving image data area 211b. In addition, at the time of the reading and decoding processing of the one moving image data 272c, the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a to be displayed at present is not erased. Setting of data in is performed.

  Thereafter, at timing t12, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the display of a moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing t12 is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100 (f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), at the timing of t13, a switchable timing to the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle occurs. However, since the effect operation device 48 is not operated by the timing of t13, switching of the angle does not occur, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t12. The display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c is continued.

  As described above, when the operation device for effect 48 is operated immediately before the angle switchable timing, the moving image of the angle to be switched to is generated by switching the angle at the next switchable timing. The switching of the angle is performed at the timing when the decoding of the data 271a to 273c is completed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of the decoding waiting time of the moving image data 271a to 273c at the time of switching the angle.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the angle display effect will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for angle display effect performed by the display CPU 201. Note that the calculation processing for angle display effect is executed in the calculation processing for effect in step S2504 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the open / close execution mode in which the angle display effect is to be executed.

  If it is the opening period immediately before starting the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), an opening process is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period set before starting the display of the moving image by any of A angle to C angle, and the display of the moving image by any of A angle to C angle is started from this opening period. And that the angle can be changed by operating the effect operating device 48 is notified. Further, in the opening period, it is possible to select an angle to be displayed at the start timing of the moving image display based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect.

  The opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined whether it is a reading period of moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). In the opening period, an angle selection period which enables selection of an angle is first set, and thereafter, a reading period of moving image data 271a to 273c is set. If it is an angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether an operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4202). The effect operating device 48 is electrically connected to the sound light MPU 62. When the effect operating device 48 is operated, the operation light command is transmitted from the sound light MPU 62 to the display CPU 201.

  If the operation generation command has been received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), the process of updating the angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is executed (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for specifying by the display CPU 201 which moving image data 271a to 273c is a target of reading at the read timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the angle counter is "0" corresponds to the A angle, the case where the value of the angle counter is "1" corresponds to the B angle, and the value of the angle counter is "2" The case corresponds to the C angle. When the opening period is started, the value of the angle counter is "0", and the operation generation command is received, the process of step S4203 is executed, and the value of the angle counter is incremented by one. Also, when the value of the angle counter after “1” addition becomes “3”, the value of the angle counter is cleared “0”.

  On the other hand, if it is a reading period of moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201: YES), moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the current value in the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is “0”, moving image data 271 a of the first order in the first moving image data group 261 of A angle is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is “1”, B angle The moving image data 272a of the first order in the first moving image data group 264 is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "2", the moving image data 273a of the first order in the first animation data group 267 of C angle is grasped Do. Thereafter, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

  If a negative determination is made in step S4202, or if the process of step S4203 is performed, or if the process of step S4205 is performed, various image data necessary to display an image corresponding to the current update timing in the opening period (Step S4206), and calculate and derive parameter information to be applied to the image data (step S4207). Then, the opening information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

  As described above, when the opening process is executed, the various image data grasped in step S4206 are arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). It is set as a target. Also, parameter information to be applied to the various image data is set in the drawing list. Further, opening information is set in the drawing list. By performing the drawing process (FIG. 70) in the VDP 205 according to the drawing list, an image for the opening period is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list, and the moving image data 271a to 273c obtained in step S4204 are stored. The address information of the memory module 203 and the address of an area where the moving image data 271a to 273c are developed as still image data are set in the moving image data area 211b. In this case, the VDP 205 reads moving image data 271a to 273c designated in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  Specifically, while grasping the addresses of the moving image data 271a to 273c from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), the moving image data 271a to 273c are still images from the information specified in the drawing list The address of the area to be expanded as data is grasped (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read out from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the still image data group as the decoding result is written in each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b obtained in step S4302 (step S4303).

  Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), if it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), the condition that the operation generation command is received from the sound side MPU 62 is the condition (step S4103: YES ), “1” is set in the operation reception flag provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4104). The operation reception flag is a flag for specifying on the display CPU 201 that the angle should be switched. Only one operation acceptance flag is provided, and even if the effect operation device 48 is operated a plurality of times before the angle switching occurs, the operation acceptance is performed for the second and subsequent operations of the effect operation device 48 Only the state in which the flag is set to "1" is maintained. Then, when the operation acceptance flag is set to “1” as described later in detail, the next turn from the current angle is taken no matter how many times the operation device for effect 48 is operated before the switching of the angle occurs. A switch to the angle occurs. Thereby, when switching of the angle occurs, the angle is switched in the order predetermined as the content of the angle display effect displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In the calculation processing for angle display effect, it is determined in step S4105 whether it is a timing at which decoding start of moving image data 271a to 273c is possible. The decoding startable timing is the angle switchable timing (timing t1 in FIG. 100, timing t2 timing, timing t4 timing t7 timing t8 timing t10 timing t12 timing t13). The timing is set as the update timing of the image a predetermined period ago, in other words, a predetermined number of times before. More specifically, the period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period in which moving image display is performed by one of the moving image data 271a to 273c, for example, the decode startable timing Corresponds to the image update timing two times earlier with respect to the switchable timing immediately thereafter. Note that whether or not it is time to decode moving image data is grasped based on an execution target table for angle display effect read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when angle display effect is started.

  If it is time to start decoding of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether "1" is set in the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 (step S4106). If "1" is not set in the operation reception flag (step S4106: NO), the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 is decremented by one (step S4107). In the case where the display of a moving image by one moving image data 271 a to 273 c for the same moving image data group 261 to 269 is continued without occurrence of switching of the angle, the timing counter keeps the same moving image data group 261 It is a counter for specifying with display CPU201 the timing which performs decoding processing of the moving image data 271a-273c of the next order in -269. In the timing counter, "3" is set when decoding processing of moving image data 271a to 273c is newly executed, and moving image data 271a to 273c are used in the situation where the same moving image data 271a to 273c are used. The value of the timing counter is decremented by "1" each time the decode timing is reached. At the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display effect, the value of the timing counter is “3”.

  When the value of the timing counter after subtraction of “1” is “0” (step S 4108: YES), at the timing when the moving image data 271 a to 273 c in the next order are decoded in the same moving image data groups 261 to 269 It means that there is. In this case, the process for decoding moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the moving picture correspondence table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read out from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As described above, the angle counter is a counter used by the display CPU 201 to identify which moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at which timing the moving image data 271a to 273c is read. The moving picture correspondence table 275 is previously stored in the memory module 203 in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. In the moving picture correspondence table 275, the relationship between the timing when switching to new moving picture data 271a to 273c may occur and the type of moving picture data 271a to 273c at the switching timing is predetermined. In addition, at each angle, new moving image data 271a to 273c are generated by the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269. Since the timing at which switching can occur is different and the types of moving image data 271 a to 273 c at the switching destination are also different, the above data is set in the moving image correspondence table 275 for each moving image data group 261 to 269 to be used. There is.

  FIG. 104 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving picture correspondence table 275 corresponding to the A angle. The contents of the moving picture correspondence table corresponding to the B angle and the moving picture correspondence table corresponding to the C angle are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 104A, pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying timing when switching to new moving image data 271a to 271c may occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times of image updating using the moving image data 271a to 271c, and more specifically, each time the image updating using the moving image data 271a to 271c is performed once. The pointer information to be referred is incremented by one. In addition, when the display of the image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c in the angle display effect is started, the pointer information of the reference target is "0". Then, the update of the pointer information of the reference object is continued without being cleared “0” on the way until the display of the image using the moving image data 271 a to 271 c in the angle display effect is finished. Therefore, the pointer information "16" means that the image has been updated 16 times using the moving image data 271a to 271c so far, and the pointer information "32" means moving image data so far This means that the image has been updated 32 times using 271a to 271c.

  One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set corresponding to each of the switching-corresponding pointer information. As described above, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a in the subsequent order is the moving image data 271a in the previous order On the other hand, the timing corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the number of still image data that can be displayed using one moving image data 271a. Therefore, the first moving image data 271a for the first moving image data group 261 is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and the number of still image data that can be displayed using one moving image data 271a. On the other hand, pointer information corresponding to each value multiplied by an integer is set as pointer information corresponding to switching. Then, for each piece of pointer information corresponding to each of the switches, information of the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically, in an area where each moving image data 271a is expanded in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204. Address information is set.

  As described above, each moving image data 271 b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image progresses for the first reference period K 1 with respect to each moving image data 271 a of the first moving image data group 261 doing. Therefore, for the second moving image data group 262, as the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271b in the first order, at the timing when the display of the moving image progresses by the first reference period K1 relative to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. In addition, for moving image data 271b after the first order in second moving image data group 262, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in moving image data 271a of first moving image data group 261 as pointer information corresponding to switching. On the other hand, pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image progresses by the first reference period K1 is set.

  As described above, each moving image data 271 c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image progresses for the second reference period K 2 with respect to each moving image data 271 a of the first moving image data group 261 doing. Therefore, with respect to the third moving image data group 263, as pointer information corresponding to switching of moving image data 271c in the first order, the timing at which the moving image display has progressed by the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. In addition, with regard to moving image data 271 c after the first order in the third moving image data group 263, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in moving image data 271 a of the first moving image data group 261 as pointer information corresponding to switching. On the other hand, pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image progresses by the second reference period K2 is set.

  Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), after the moving image correspondence table 275 is read, moving image data 271a to 273c to be read this time to execute decoding processing are grasped (step S4110). At the time of grasping, the target moving picture counter provided in the work RAM 202 is referred to. The target moving image counter is a counter used by the display CPU 201 to identify which moving image data groups 261 to 269 are to be read at the read timing of the moving image data 271 a to 273 c. The case where the value of the target moving image counter is “0” corresponds to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is “1” is the second moving image data group 262, 265 , 268, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is “2” corresponds to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. In step S4110, the types of moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read out are specified in the moving image correspondence table 275 read out in step S4109 based on the value of the target moving image counter. Then, among the pointer information corresponding to switching which is set for the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read, it is a value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect, and is set to the current pointer information. On the other hand, the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c set corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the closest value is grasped. As a result, the information on the moving image data 271 a to 273 c to be read out this time and to execute the decoding process is grasped by the display CPU 201.

  Thereafter, “3” is set in the timing counter of the work RAM 202 (step S4111), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, decoding specification information is set in the current drawing list, and the information on the address of the memory module 203 in which the moving image data 271 to 273 c identified in step S4110 are stored, and the moving image In the data area 211b, an address of an area for developing the moving image data 271a to 273c as still image data is set. Having received the drawing list, the VDP 205 executes the decoding process (FIG. 103) as described above to read the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b. The decoding process is executed, and each still image data after the decoding process is written to the designated area in the moving image data area 211b.

  On the other hand, in the arithmetic processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), when it is the decode startable timing and “1” is set in the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 (step S4105 and step S4106: YES), the operation The acceptance flag is cleared to "0" (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). When the angle is changed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect, the switching reference table 276 changes the type of the angle and moving image data groups 261 to 269 as the switching destination in relation to the current angle and the type of moving image data groups 261 to 269. Is a table for identifying

  FIG. 104 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying timing when switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c may occur. The contents of the pointer information are the same as the contents described for the moving picture correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104 (a). The pointer information for switching is set according to the switchable timing of each of the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269. It is done. Specifically, the pointer information of the first switching correspondence is set to pointer information of the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect, and subsequent switching correspondence The pointer information of is set for the pointer information corresponding to the previous switching, at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1.

  For the pointer information corresponding to each switch, information on the correspondence between the current angle and the combination of the angle to which the switch is to be made and the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set. Specifically, when the angle is changed as triggered by the operation of the operation device for effect 48 as described above, A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → C angle → A angle → ... In this order, angle switching occurs. Also, the switchable timing to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, the switchable timing to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268, and the switchable timing to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 are The contents are as described for the moving picture correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104 (a). Therefore, the correspondence relationship as shown in FIG. 104 (b) is obtained.

  Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), after the switching reference table 276 is read out, the setting processing of the angle counter and the target moving image counter is executed based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In the setting process, among the pointer information corresponding to switching, which is set in the switching reference table 276, the value corresponding to the switching of a value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect and closest to the current pointer information In the pointer information corresponding to the switching, the information set corresponding to the current angle is specified. For example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “10” and the current angle is the A angle, the B angle information is specified as the information of the switching destination angle based on the switching reference table 276 and switching The information of the second moving image data group 265 is specified as the information of the previous moving image data groups 261 to 269. Further, for example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “68” and the current angle is the C angle, the information of the A angle is specified as the switching destination angle information based on the switching reference table 276, The information of the third moving image data group 263 is specified as the information of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 of the switching destination. The specified angle information of the switching destination is set to the angle counter, and the information of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 of the specified switching destination is set to the target moving image counter.

  After the processes of step S4113 to step S4115 are performed, the processes of step S4109 to step S4112 described above are performed. In this case, in step S4109, the moving picture correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the angle counter newly set in step S4115 is read out, and in step S4110, the value of the target moving picture counter newly set in step S4115 The moving image data 271a to 273c are grasped.

  In the calculation processing for angle display effect, it is determined whether it is a timing to change the type of moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processing of step S4109 to step S4112 is executed, “1” is set to the change trigger flag provided in the work RAM 202. In step S4116, when the change trigger flag is set to "1" and the switchable timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c comes, the timing to change the type of moving image data 271a to 273c. Affirmative determination is made as The switchable timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is as described above, and the first switchable timing corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image progresses by the first reference period K1 relative to the start timing of the angle display effect The switchable timing thereafter corresponds to the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed by the first reference period K1 with respect to the immediately preceding switchable timing.

  If it is time to change the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to "0" (step S4117). When the determination in step S4116 is affirmative, the change trigger flag is cleared to "0". The frame counter is used by the display CPU 201 to identify which still image data of the still image data of the moving image data 271 a to 273 c developed in the moving image data area 211 b of the VRAM 204 is to be used. It is. When the value of the frame counter is “0”, still image data of the first order in one piece of moving image data 271 a to 273 c developed is grasped as an object to be used. Further, when still image data is grasped as an object to be used in step S4118 described later, the value of the frame counter is incremented by one, and in the next step S4118 the still image in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the one addition. Data is grasped for use.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4116, or if the process of step S4117 is executed, still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped as image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4118) . In this case, the value of the frame counter is incremented by one. Further, while grasping other image data necessary to display an image corresponding to the update timing of this time (step S4119), parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in step S4118 and step S4119 is calculated. It derives (step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

  As described above, when the calculation processing for angle display effect is executed, the various image data grasped in step S4118 and step S4119 are included in the drawing list transmitted to VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). Are set as placement targets in the world coordinate system. Also, parameter information to be applied to the various image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, angle rendering information is set in the drawing list.

  When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, it first grasps the still image data grasped in step S4118 as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105 as setting processing for angle display effect (step S4401) and then step S4119. The other image data grasped by the image is grasped (step S4402). Further, the parameter information grasped in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). The image data grasped in step S4401 and step S4402 is set in the world coordinate system in a state where the parameter information grasped in step S4403 is applied (step S4404). Thereby, drawing data for displaying an image for angle display effect is finally created, and an image for angle display effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The setting process for angle display effect is executed in the setting process for effect in step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the angle effect information is set is received.

  As described above, each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271 a to 273 c, so moving image data 271 a to 273 c in a predetermined order and moving image data 271 a to 273 c in the next order. It is possible to use the switching timing as the angle changing timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the type of angle among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle during execution of the angle display effect.

  The moving image data 271a to 273c has a data amount set such that still image data of the minimum unit number that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. As a result, it is possible to set many timings at which it is possible to switch the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to reduce the data amount of image data read out at one time.

  A plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each angle of A to C are provided. In each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267. The third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268, while being shifted by the first reference period K1 corresponding to The first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of data units is shifted. This makes it possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in the predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle, and the operation timing of the operation device 48 for effect is generated. It is possible to change the angle early.

  The moving image data 271a to 273c are not read out collectively for each angle to be selected, but in a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and is to be used, it is next to be used When it is time to decode moving image data 271a to 273c, which is the above, one moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read and decoded. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to read moving image data 271a to 273c in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204.

  In a situation where one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next is read and decoded. As a result, when new moving image data 271a to 273c are to be used, it is possible to prevent a waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c.

  In the configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operating device 48, the operation timing of the effect operating device 48 is later than the decoding start possible timing even if it is before the switchable timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, the change of the angle with respect to the operation of the effect operating device 48 occurs not at the immediately following switchable timing but at the next switchable timing with respect to the immediately next switchable timing. Thereby, it becomes possible to smoothly perform the angle switching with respect to the operation of the effect operating device 48.

<Another form of angle display effect>
The number of images that can be displayed is not limited to the same configuration by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least a part of moving image data is another moving image The configuration may be different from the data. In this case, it is necessary to set the switchable timing and the decode startable timing to new moving image data 271a to 273c according to the type of each moving image data 271a to 273c.

  In a configuration in which moving image display using moving image data is started when the operation device for effect 48 is operated during the operation valid period, from the timing corresponding to the elapsed time from the start timing of the operation valid period. A moving image data group that makes it possible to display a series of specific moving images, and another moving image data group that makes it possible to display moving images started from the middle of the specific moving image with respect to the configuration that is started You may apply the structure in which and are provided separately.

  The number of moving image data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more. Further, the type of angle is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more.

<Configuration for performing special video use effect>
Next, a configuration for performing special moving image use presentation will be described.

  The special moving image use effect is an effect that uses the special moving image data 282 when displaying an image on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 282, and FIG. 106 (a) shows normal moving image data 281 such as the moving image data 271a to 273c described above, and FIG. 106 (b) Indicates special moving image data 282.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), file data is set to the first address of the moving image data 281, and compressed data of each frame is set subsequently to the file data. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data is I frame data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data And.

  The I picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data of one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one or more frames prior to decoding. . B picture data is bi-directionally predicted by referring to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames before and I picture data or P picture data of one frame or plural frames after decoding. , One frame worth of still image data can be created.

  In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 281, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the mth frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) -th frame,..., N-1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  By executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 281, still image data 283 a to 283 d (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 283 a to 283 d) corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 281 It will be created in the moving image data area 211b. In this case, the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are mutually different.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), in the special moving image data 282, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data is set. The compressed data other than the I picture data is not set. By executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, still image data 284 (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 284) corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 282 is a moving image data area of the VRAM 204. It will be created in 211b. However, in the special decoded image data 284, the contents of the image displayed by the special decoded image data 284 are all the same image data.

  The amount of data of the special moving image data 282 is set such that still image data of the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, for the still image data for the minimum unit number, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, 48 image updates (48 frame updates) become possible. ing. Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, the same special decoded image data 284 as the content of the image is generated for the minimum number of units. The amount of moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 is set so that still image data for the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced as described above. However, the amount of normal moving image data 281 other than moving image data 271 a to 273 c is set such that still image data of a number larger than the minimum unit number that can be set as moving image data can be created There is.

  The special moving image data 282 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 in the same manner as the normal moving image data 281. However, in the memory module 203, plural types of special moving image data 282 are stored. The content of the image by the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding process is different for each type of the special moving image data 282.

  Special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, predetermined object data for applying special decoded image data 284 as texture data is stored in the memory module 203 in advance. The type of the image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 and the predetermined object data is arbitrary, but may be configured to display a character image of an animal such as a person, a cat, a fish and a dog, for example. It may be configured to display an individual image that is an image of the object.

  By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, one piece of texture data can be stored in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 as still image data is all read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for expanding the VRAM 204. It is written to the texture area 211 a in the buffer 211. In this case, the required storage capacity in the texture area 211a increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, if it is attempted to change the type of texture data read out to the texture area 211a every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load of the VDP 205 will increase.

  On the other hand, by storing a part of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out a part of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed while making the replacement of the texture area 211a unnecessary. It becomes. In addition, since it is stored as the special moving image data 282 instead of being stored as the texture data in the memory module 203, creating texture data from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the special moving image data 282 is read out to the moving image data area 211b instead of the texture data itself. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read out to the moving image data area 211b.

  Next, how a special moving image use presentation is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 107 (a) shows the supply start timing of the operating power, FIG. 107 (b) shows the reading period of the texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, and FIG. 107 (c) shows the texture area 211a. FIG. 107 (d) shows the start timing of the special moving image use effect, and FIG. 107 (e) shows the special moving image use effect execution period, and the special moving image data 282 is used. FIG. 107 (f) shows a reading period of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107 (g) shows a use period of the special moving image data 282. .

  At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), the supply start timing of the operation power to the display CPU 201 causes texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a as shown in FIG. 107 (b). The reading of the texture data is completed at the timing of t2. Thus, as shown in FIG. 107C, while the supply of the operating power to the VRAM 204 is continued, all texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is stored and held in the texture area 211a. . In addition, since backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, when the supply of operation power to the display control device 200 is stopped, texture data can not be stored and held in the texture area 211a.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), it becomes the start timing of the special moving image use presentation. However, the use of the special moving image data 282 is not started at the timing of t3. Therefore, at the timing of t3, when the supply of the operation data and the object data read out to the area other than the texture area 211a and the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 is started as needed. Drawing data is created using the texture data read out to the area 211a, and an image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data.

  Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), when the timing for reading the special moving image data 282 is reached, reading of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b starts. At the same time, the special moving image data 282 read to the moving image data area 211b is decoded. Then, at time t5, the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and the plurality of specially decoded image data 284 created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is for moving image data. It is written to the area 211b.

  At timing t5 when the decoding processing of the special moving image data 282 is completed, display of an image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107 (g). In this case, special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data to be attached to predetermined object data, and projection to a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed including the predetermined object data and the special decoded image data 284. Drawing data is created. Then, by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data, the display of the image using the special decoded image data 284 is performed. After that, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends at the timing of t6.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the special moving image use presentation will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the special moving image use effect executed by the display CPU 201. It should be noted that the calculation processing for the special moving image use presentation is executed in the effect calculation processing of step S2504 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the game session where the special moving image use presentation should be executed.

  If the special moving image data 282 is not in use period (step S 4501: NO), the special moving image data 282 is referred to by referring to the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 to perform execution control of the special moving image use effect. It is determined whether it is the read timing (step S4502). If it is the read timing of the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read this time to execute the decoding process is grasped (step S4502). Note that there are a plurality of types of special moving image use effects, and the types of special moving image data 282 to be used are different for each type of special moving image use effect. Further, the decode specification information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

  Thereafter, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing are grasped (step S4505), and parameter information to be applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use presentation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). The various image data grasped in step S4505 include the object data stored in the memory module 203 and the texture data read in the texture area 211a.

  As described above, when the calculation process for the special moving image use effect is executed, the various image data grasped in step S4505 is the world in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). It is set as a placement target in the coordinate system. Also, parameter information to be applied to the various image data is set in the drawing list. Further, special moving image use presentation information is set in the drawing list.

  Further, when the decode specification information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode specification information is set in the drawing list, and the special moving image data 282 grasped in step S4503 is stored. The address information of the memory module 203 and the address of an area for expanding the special moving image data 282 as the special decoded image data 284 in the moving image data area 211 b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads out the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211 b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  Specifically, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information designated in the drawing list (step S4301), and the special moving image data 282 is specially decoded image data from the information designated in the drawing list. The address of the area to be expanded is grasped as 284 (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, the plurality of specially decoded image data 284 as the decoding result is written in each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b obtained in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 is written to the moving image data area 211 b.

  Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect (FIG. 108), if it is a use period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: YES), specially decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202. Are grasped as image data to be used at the present update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is used by the display CPU 201 to specify which special decoded image data 284 of the special decoded image data 284 of the special moving image data 282 expanded in the moving image data area 211 b is to be used. It is a counter. The frame counter is also used when using normal moving image data 281 such as an angle display effect. Also, when the use period of the special moving image data 282 is started, the value of the frame counter is “0”, and when the value of the frame counter is “0”, the first order in the special moving image data 282 The special decoded image data 284 of is grasped as an object of use. Also, when the special decoded image data 284 is grasped as an object to be used in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is incremented by one, and in the next step S4508 the special decoding in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the one addition. Image data 284 is grasped as an object to be used.

  Here, as described above, the plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by performing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the special decoded image data 284 is The content of the image displayed using it is the same. On the other hand, when the specially decoded image data 284 is used as texture data, the specially decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one specially decoded image data 284. As a result, it is possible to use the same processing configuration as in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

  Thereafter, other image data necessary to display an image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which the special decoded image data 284 is applied. Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in step S4508 and step S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and use indication information of the special moving image data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

  As described above, when the calculation process for the special moving image use effect is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various images grasped in step S4508 and step S4509. Data is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. Also, parameter information to be applied to the various image data is set in the drawing list. Further, usage instruction information of special moving image data is set in the drawing list.

  When the VDP 205 receives a drawing list in which special moving image use effect information or use instruction information of special moving image data is set, the VDP 205 executes setting processing for the special moving image use effect. In the setting process for the special moving image use effect, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, when the use instructing information of the special moving image data is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoding grasped in step S4508 The image data 284 is grasped (step S4602). Further, the other image data grasped in step S4509 is grasped (step S4603), and the parameter information grasped in step S4510 is grasped (step S4604). The image data grasped in step S4602 and step S4603 is set in the world coordinate system in a state where the parameter information grasped in step S4604 is applied (step S4605). Thereby, drawing data for displaying an image for special moving image use effect using special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for special moving image use effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 It will be done. The setting process for the special moving image use effect is for the effect of step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the use instructing information of the special moving image data is set is received. It is executed in the setting process of.

  By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, one piece of texture data can be stored in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 as still image data is all read out from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for expanding the VRAM 204. It is written to the texture area 211 a in the buffer 211. In this case, the required storage capacity in the texture area 211a increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, if it is attempted to change the type of texture data read out to the texture area 211a every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load of the VDP 205 will increase.

  On the other hand, by storing a part of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, it is possible to read out a part of the texture data to the VRAM 204 as needed while making the replacement of the texture area 211a unnecessary. It becomes. In addition, since it is stored as the special moving image data 282 instead of being stored as the texture data in the memory module 203, creating texture data from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the special moving image data 282 is read out to the moving image data area 211b instead of the texture data itself. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read out to the moving image data area 211b.

  The number of specially decoded image data 284 generated by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is one type. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary image data from being created.

  A plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by performing decoding processing on one type of special moving image data 282 is all the same image data, and an image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 The contents are the same. On the other hand, when the specially decoded image data 284 is used as texture data, the specially decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one specially decoded image data 284. As a result, it is possible to use the same processing configuration as in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

  The special moving image data 282 has only I picture data, and does not have difference data such as B picture data and P picture data. As a result, the data configuration of the special moving image data 282 can be simplified.

  The special moving image data 282 is set as the data amount of the smallest unit that can be set as moving image data. As a result, the data volume of the special moving image data 282 can be reduced.

<Another form of special video use effect>
In addition to the texture data, the object data may be read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since it is not necessary to read object data into the VRAM 204 at an appropriate timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 at each creation timing of drawing data.

  A plurality of types of image data may be created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, but only one or some of them may be used. Even in this case, texture data can be handled as moving image data.

  The configuration may be such that only one image data is created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282.

  A plurality of special moving image data 282 is set only for the same I picture data, and when decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 282, image data for the number of I picture data may be created. .

  A plurality of image data of the same type is created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, but only one of the image data may be used. In this case, among the plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process, only one image data may be stored and held in the moving image data area 211b, and the remaining may be deleted.

  An additional storage area is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 282. All or part of the image data created in the moving image data area 211b is stored in another storage area. It may be configured to be transferred. In this case, the image data can be stored and held in the separate storage area even after use, and the special moving image data 282 can be obtained by reading out the image data from the separate storage area at the next use. There is no need to execute the decoding process again for.

  The special moving image data 282 includes difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference is “0”. Even in this case, a plurality of specially decoded image data 284 of the same type can be created.

Other Embodiments
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) The processing configuration of the sound light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment are configured to display a 3D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the second embodiment. It may apply to Further, the processing configuration of the sound light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment are configured to display a 2D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment. It may apply.

  (2) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead, all cameras arranged in the world coordinate system are arranged. A configuration may be adopted in which a single camera is commonly set for image data.

  (3) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, the effect image and the symbol image, but it is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image It may be configured to be projected, may be projected together in units of the effect image and the symbol image, or may be projected as all together.

  (4) In the second embodiment, when color information setting processing (step S2609) is performed, setting of color information such as pasting of a texture may be performed only on the projected surface. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, setting of color information such as texture mapping may be performed after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

  (5) The display control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 The device 90 may control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one function of the both control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control unit 50, and both functions of both control units may be integrated into the main control unit 50. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

  (6) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, and the like.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means is created by the execution of the decoding process, and the special motion image data (special motion image data 282) of which image data to be used is one type by the display control means is the display storage means A game machine characterized by being stored in

  According to the feature A1, the special moving image data after the decoding process is performed and the special moving image data of which the image data to be used is one type is provided by the display control means. It becomes possible to treat as image data. This makes it possible to use the one type of image data without increasing the capacity of the same type of image data as the one type of image data after the decoding.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data in which one type of image data is created by execution of the decoding process.

  According to the feature A2, when special moving image data is decoded, plural types of image data are not created, but one type of image data is created, so unnecessary image data is created. It is possible to achieve the above effects while preventing the problem.

  Feature A3. The game according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the special moving image data is data in which a plurality of special image data (still image data 284) having the same content is created by execution of the decoding process. Machine.

  According to the feature A3, when the special moving image data is subjected to the decoding process, a plurality of special image data having the same content is generated, so the same processing as image data generated from other moving image data is performed. It is possible to use special image data of the same content at update timings of a plurality of images.

  Feature A4. The display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data when the image update timing is a predetermined update timing, and next to the predetermined update timing. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that the special image data of the next order is used for the predetermined order when the update timing is.

  According to the feature A4, a plurality of special image data having the same content is created by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data, and the special image data is to be used in a predetermined order. Thus, the special image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data, and the image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data other than the special moving image data It becomes possible to treat similarly.

Feature A5. For moving image data other than the special moving image data, reference data (I picture data) serving as a reference when creating the image data by performing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the reference data And differential data (B picture data, P picture data) capable of creating image data different from the image data created by the reference data by applying to
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data has the reference data and does not have the difference data.

  According to the feature A5, since the special moving image data has the reference data and does not have the differential data, the data configuration of the special moving image data in which only one type of image data is created when the decoding process is executed. Can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the special moving image data.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a data amount of a minimum unit which can be set as moving image data.

  According to the feature A6, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the special moving image data.

Feature A7. The display control means executes predetermined processing on predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage means to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (step in VDP 205) Function to execute the processing of S2609),
When displaying an image corresponding to special image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the predetermined process is performed on the special image data by the predetermined process execution unit And
When the image data is used in the display control unit, the image data is read from the display storage unit to the read storage unit (VRAM 204).
The read storage means includes a first read area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second read area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read. A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 characterized in that:

  According to the feature A7, when image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the storage means for display, but is used after being read once to the storage means for reading Therefore, by reading out the image data in advance to the storage means for reading out, when using the image data in the display control means, it is possible to use the image data immediately. In addition, the read-out storage means is provided with a first read-out area from which predetermined image data is read out and a second read-out area from which special moving image data is read out. An area is set, and when using the image data in the display control means, it is possible to specify the area according to the type of the image data.

  In this case, even though only one type of special image data is to be used in the display control means, the special image data is displayed not as the predetermined image data but as the special moving image data. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not to the first reading area but to the second reading area, it is not necessary to secure the area for using the special image data in the first reading area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature A8. A plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the display storage unit,
The game machine is
A first read execution unit (a function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) for reading out all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first read area when the predetermined read timing is reached;
In the case where image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area in a situation where image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area, Second read execution means (a function of executing the decoding process in the VDP 205) for overwriting the image data already stored in the second read area;
The gaming machine according to feature A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, since all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first readout region, it is not necessary to read out the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, moving image data is read out to the second reading area as necessary, and when new moving image data is read out, the second reading area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, even though only one type of special image data is to be used in the display control means, the special image data is displayed not as the predetermined image data but as the special moving image data. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, since the special image data is read out not to the first reading area but to the second reading area, it is not necessary to secure the area for using the special image data in the first reading area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the first read execution means reads all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first read area when the supply of operating power is started.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to quickly generate a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first readout region.

  Feature A10. The special image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used to display a three-dimensional image according to any one of the features A1 to A9. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A10, when using texture data, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6 One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
Data for determining the display mode of the individual image at each update timing of the image when the specific variation display is performed on the individual image (the symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) over the predetermined period in the display unit Information storage means (memory module) for storing in advance information for mode determination (execution target table T10 for acceleration period, execution target table T11 for first high speed period, execution target table T12 for first low speed period) in which 74),
The display control means
Object determining means for determining at least one of the types of the individual images to which the mode determining information is applied in a plurality of types of individual images and the order of applying the mode determining information in a plurality of types of individual images Function in step S908 and step S1011 in
Application execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1012 to step S1014 in the display CPU 72) that performs the specific variation display by applying the mode determination information according to the content determined by the object determination means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the mode determining information is commonly applied to a plurality of types of individual images. As a result, the mode determination information can be commonly used for various situations in which the specific variation display is performed, and the number of mode determination information can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the mode determination information in the information storage means.

Feature B2. When the specific variation display is newly started, the individual image of the type displayed at the start is display-controlled so as to start the variation display according to a predetermined variation start mode, and is displayed at the start The type of the individual image to be
Information for causing the individual image to perform variation display according to at least the predetermined variation start aspect is set as the aspect determination information,
The object determining means is configured to apply the mode determination information to a plurality of types of individual images according to the type of individual images displayed at the start of the specific variation display. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein at least one of the order of applying the mode determination information in an individual image is determined.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the specific fluctuation display is started by making the mode of the fluctuation display at the start of the specific fluctuation display constant in a predetermined fluctuation start mode. . Also, even when the aspect of the fluctuation display at the start of the specific fluctuation display is constant as such, the type of the individual image displayed at the start may change, whereby the specific fluctuation display is started It is possible to diversify the aspect in

  In the configuration, information for causing the variation display of the individual image to be performed by the predetermined variation start mode at the start of the specific variation display is set in the mode determination information, and is displayed at the start of the specific variation display At least one of the type of the individual image to which the information for mode determination is applied and the order of the individual images is determined in a mode corresponding to the type of individual image. As a result, even if the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display can change, it becomes possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variation display.

  Feature B3. The individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variation display is ended last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution cycle. The gaming machine according to feature B2.

  According to the feature B3, since the individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variation display ended last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution cycle, the specific variation When the display is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give continuity to each execution time of the specific variation display. In this case, although the types of individual images for which the variable display is to be started are different according to a predetermined change start mode at the start of the specific variable display, the configuration of the feature B2 makes it possible to specify Even in the configuration in which the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the variable display can change, it is possible to commonly use the information for mode determination for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B4. In the mode determination information, mode information (task content) for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in time series,
The target determining means changes the type of the individual image to which the specific variation display is to be performed, along with the progress of the specific variation display, the type of the individual image to which each of the aspect information is applied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, characterized in that it is determined in accordance with that.

  According to the feature B4, even if the type of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variation display changes with the progress of the specific variation display, the mode information set in time series in the mode determination information is applied The type of individual image of the subject to be As a result, even if the type of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variation display changes with the progress of the specific variation display, the mode determination information can be commonly used.

  Feature B5. The information for mode determination is set as information corresponding to a period longer than the longest duration assumed as a situation in which the information for mode determination is used, any one of the features B1 to B4 The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature B5, the mode determination information can be commonly used regardless of the duration of the various situations in which the mode determination information is used.

  Feature B6. The continuation period of the situation where the information for mode determination is used is a predetermined timing from the switching timing of one of the types of the individual image to which the information for mode determining is applied to the next switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein use of the mode determining information is set to end.

  In the case of a configuration in which mode determination information is set according to the duration of various situations in which mode determination information is used, the mode determination is performed in the middle of time-series information set in mode determination information. It is assumed that the next control information is to be used at the end timing of use of the use information. In this case, according to the feature B6, the end timing of use of the mode determining information is determined in advance from one switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the mode determining information is applied to the next switching timing. Timing is As a result, it is possible to make the situation for starting the use of the next control information constant, and the design of the control information can be facilitated.

  Note that “the predetermined timing from the switching timing of one of the types of the individual image to which the information for mode determination is applied to the next switching timing” is the target for applying the information for mode determination The timing at which the type of the individual image is switched is also included.

Feature B7. The information for mode determination is
A mode information group (task content) in which mode information for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in time series;
A target information group (a display symbol adjustment area) in which a plurality of target information in which information on the type of the individual image to which the mode information is applied is set in correspondence with the mode information;
Equipped with
The object determining means is characterized by setting the information of the type of the individual image for each of the object information included in the object information group when starting to use the mode determining information. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, since the mode information group and the target information group are set in the mode determining information, the individual of the target to which the mode information is applied at each update timing only by referring to the mode determining information It becomes possible to grasp the type of image. In this case, when the use of the mode determination information is started, information on the type of the individual image is set for each of the target information included in the target information group of the mode determination information. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to execute the process of adjusting the type of the individual image to be applied during the execution of the specific variation display, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during the execution of the specific variation display.

Feature B8. The specific variation display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variation display areas,
The game according to any one of the features B1 to B7, wherein the mode determination information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variation display in each of the plurality of variation display areas. Machine.

  According to the feature B8, the information for mode determination is commonly used for the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas, so that the number of information for mode determination can be reduced.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6 One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
The display control means is a simultaneous display control means (in the display CPU 72) for causing the first type image (loop display character G4) and the second type image (loop display background G5) to be simultaneously displayed on the display unit. VDP 76), which is a function to execute arithmetic processing for character loop and arithmetic processing for background loop,
The gaming machine is configured to display first mode information (character moving table 123) in which first mode information for determining a display mode of the first type image is set in time series, and a display mode of the second type image. And information storage means (memory module 74) for pre-storing second mode determination information (background table 124) in which second mode information for determining
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control unit determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and A game machine characterized by determining a display mode of the second type image in accordance with second mode determination information.

  According to the feature C1, in the configuration in which the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed, the mode determining information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is one aspect Information for determination of the first mode for determining the display mode of the first type image, and information for determination of the second mode for determining the display mode of the second type image, not provided as information for determination Are provided individually. Thereby, in the situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is stopped and displayed, the other is variably displayed, and then the image on the side on which the display is stopped is changed from the status in which the stopped display is performed. Even when the display is resumed, it is possible to independently perform display control of each type image using each of the first mode determining information and the second mode determining information. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably perform control of a display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed.

Feature C2. The first mode determination information is
A first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first reference information is sequentially set, in which reference targets by the simultaneous display control means are sequentially updated each time the first type image is updated;
A first mode information group in which first mode information for determining a display mode of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is set to correspond to each of the first reference information Content) and
Equipped with
The second mode determination information is
A second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of second reference information are sequentially set such that the reference object is sequentially updated by the simultaneous display control unit each time the second type image is updated;
A second mode information group in which second mode information for determining a display mode of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is set to correspond to each of the second reference information Content) and
The gaming machine according to feature C1, comprising:

  According to the feature C2, a dedicated first reference information group is set in the first mode determination information, and a dedicated second reference information group is set in the second mode determination information. Thus, while not using one of the first mode determining information and the second mode determining information, the updating of the reference information to be referred to by the other is continued, or the reference information to be referred to by the other is It becomes possible to perform holding in predetermined reference information.

Feature C3. The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for causing the first type image to be displayed in a first variation mode is set in time series.
The information storage means is a third mode determining information in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in time series (character stopping table 122) The game machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized in that

  According to the feature C3, different mode determination information is provided in correspondence with the difference in the contents of the variation mode even when the first type image is displayed. Thereby, the mode to be used is determined at the time of switching between the situation in which the first type image is displayed in the first variation mode and the situation in which the first type image is displayed in the variation mode different from the first variation mode. It is only necessary to switch the usage information between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information, and it becomes possible to preferably switch these variation modes.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means
First simultaneous display control means (step S1102 to step S1104, step S1109 to step S1113 and step S11 in the display CPU 72) for performing display control of the display unit so that both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed A function of executing the processing of step S1202 to step S1206),
Second simultaneous display control means (step S1105 to step S1113 in the display CPU 72) for performing display control of the display unit so that one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stop displayed. A function of executing the processing of steps S1207 to S1208);
A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3 characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C4, a situation in which both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed, and a situation in which one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stopped and displayed By being generated, it is possible to diversify the display mode even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, since the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are separately provided in the configuration of the feature C1, the first mode determination information and the first mode determination information are displayed when switching the display states. It is only necessary to switch the use status of the second mode determination information, and it is possible to preferably switch the display status.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means performs display control of the display unit such that the first type image performs display in a first variation mode, and the second type image performs display in a second variation mode.
The second simultaneous display control means performs display control of the display unit such that the first type image performs display in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image performs stop display.
The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the first variation mode is set in time series.
The information storage means prestores third mode determination information (character stopping table 122) in which the information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the different variation mode is set in time series. The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that

  According to the feature C5, a situation in which the first type image is variably displayed by the first variation mode and the second type image is variably displayed by the second variation mode, and the first type image is different from the first variation mode Due to the situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed by the occurrence of the situation where the second type image is stopped and displayed while being variably displayed according to the variation mode, the display aspect is diversified It is possible to In this case, the first mode determining information and the third mode determining information are separately provided for the first type image, and the second mode determining information is separately provided for the second type image. ing. Thereby, when switching the display conditions, the target of use is switched between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information for the first type image, and the second mode determination for the second type image It is only necessary to switch between the status of updating the information to be used and the status of fixing the usage information. Therefore, it is possible to preferably switch these display states.

Feature C6. In the first mode determination information, information necessary for causing the first type image to perform a series of display in the first variation mode is set in time series,
The simultaneous display control means can repeat the display of the series of first variation modes by the first type image by repeatedly using the first mode determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

  According to the feature C6, by repeatedly using the first mode determination information, it is possible to repeatedly perform the display of the series of first variation modes on the first type image. When the information for variably displaying the first type image and the information for variably displaying the second type image are integrated and set as the information for determining the mode, a series of first in the first type image When one cycle of the display of the variation mode is finished and the next one cycle is started, the first type image is displayed in the first type image as long as the display content of the second type image is not started. There is a need to set more information for one display of the variation mode than for one round. In this case, information exceeding one round is wasted. On the other hand, since the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are individually provided with the configuration of the feature C1, there is no need to set such useless information.

Feature C7. In the second mode determination information, information necessary for causing the second type image to perform a series of display in the second variation mode is set in time series.
The simultaneous display control means can repeatedly perform the display of the series of second variation modes by the second type image by repeatedly using the second mode determination information,
The number of update timings of the first type image required to cause the first type image to perform display in the first fluctuation mode for one rotation, and the display according to the second fluctuation mode in the second type image 1 The gaming machine according to the feature C6, wherein the number of update timings of the second type image necessary for performing the cycle is different.

  According to the feature C7, since the first mode determining information and the second mode determining information are separately provided, only the information corresponding to one rotation of each of the first variation mode and the second variation mode Can be set in each mode determination information, and it is not necessary to set useless information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means
When the display of the first type image according to the first mode determining information is started, the start information is set in the start information storage means (the interlocking flag 125), and the first mode determining information is followed according to the first mode determining information A unit for deleting the start information from the start information storage unit when the display of the first type image is ended (a function of executing the processing of step S1103 and step S1107 in the display CPU 72);
A unit for displaying the second type image according to the second mode determination information when the start information is set in the start information storage unit (Affirmative determination is made in step S1201 of the display CPU 72) Function),
A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7, comprising:

  According to the feature C8, when the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, the start information is set and the display is deleted when the display is ended, and the start information is deleted. Since the second type image is displayed according to the second mode determination information when the second mode determination information is set, it is only necessary to prepare in advance information on the usage start timing of the first mode determination information. The second aspect determination information can be used in accordance with the use of the first aspect determination information. As a result, in the configuration in which the first mode determining information and the second mode determining information are individually provided, it is possible to reduce the information amount of the information of the use start timing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6 One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
It is possible to create drawing data based on setting the image data in setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and output an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the basis of the display unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
The display control means
First setting range control means (display CPU 72) for displaying the first setting range image by setting the range to be set in the storage means for setting in the specific image data (decoded image data 132) as the first setting range Function to execute the processing of step S1307 to step S1309 in VDP 76),
Second setting range control means for displaying a second setting range image by setting a range to be set to the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range (Function to execute the processing of step S1311 to step S1313 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, the first setting range image and the first setting range image and the second setting range are changed by changing the range to be set in the setting storage unit between the first setting range and the second setting range while using the same specific image data. It becomes possible to display each of 2 setting range images. As a result, even if the type of image data is small, it is possible to change the contents of the displayed image.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to the feature D1, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap.

  According to the feature D2, since the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap with each other, between the first setting range image and the second setting range image while using the same specific image data It is possible to make a slight image change.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the second set range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image in which the first set range image is displayed.

  According to the feature D3, the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image at which the first setting range image is displayed, whereby the first setting range image and the second setting range image are a series of images. It can be used as

Feature D4. When the first set range image and the second set range image both include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction Wherein the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed,
The display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second set range image is moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first set range image The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the first set range and the second set range are set to correspond to the display position.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to realize display of an image displayed so that a predetermined individual image moves in a predetermined direction by a small number of image data.

  Feature D5. The first set range image and the second set range image are images for displaying a large number of the predetermined individual images in an effect period in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, since the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed using the same specific image data in a situation where a large number of predetermined individual images are displayed, the same specific image data is used It is hard to notice what you are doing.

Feature D6. The data size of the specific image data is set to be larger than the data size of the area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage unit,
The first set range and the second set range correspond to a range in which the entire area to be displayed on the display unit in the storage means for setting is filled with any of the features D1 to D5. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2.

  According to the feature D6, it can be made inconspicuous that the first set range image and the second set range image are being displayed using the same specific image data.

  Feature D7. The specific image data is image data created by performing a decoding process on moving image data stored in the display storage unit, according to any one of the features D1 to D6. The gaming machine described.

  Even if the number of image data created by performing the decoding process on moving image data is smaller than the update timing of the image, the configuration of the feature D1 is provided, and the same specific image data is Since it is possible to display different images of the first set range image and the second set range image by using it, it becomes possible to prevent the same image from being displayed between a plurality of update timings. .

Feature D8. A plurality of image data generated by performing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. And
In the feature D7, the first set range control means and the second set range control means apply the first set range and the second set range to each of the plurality of image data. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D8, the situation where the number of image data created by performing the decoding process on moving image data is smaller than the image update timing while dealing with the same processing configuration is dealt with It is possible to

Feature D9. A plurality of image data generated by performing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. And
The second set range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image on which the first set range image is displayed,
With respect to the first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image, the second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is the predetermined individual image is the predetermined display position The first setting range and the second setting range are set to correspond to the display position moved in the direction,
In an image displayed next to the second set range image using next-use image data to be used next to the specific image data among the plurality of image data, the display position of the predetermined individual image The predetermined individual image has a movement amount equal to or substantially the same as the movement amount from the first display position to the second display position with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second setting range image Is the display position moved in the predetermined direction, the game machine according to feature D7 or D8.

  According to the feature D9, even when the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed from the same specific image data, the movement amount of the predetermined individual image in the predetermined direction between the plurality of update timings It becomes possible to make it constant.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B8, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D9, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G6 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D9. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
The display control means
The first display contents (the size position information of the band image G24 and the position information of the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing in the case where the change display in the predetermined aspect is performed on the predetermined individual image The first determining means (step in display CPU 72) for determining using the first predetermined mode determining information (band display table 145) in which first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content is set in time series A function of executing the processing of step S1606, step S1615 and step S1616),
The second predetermined content (the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing in the case where the predetermined individual image is subjected to change display according to the predetermined aspect is the first predetermined aspect Second determining means for determining without using determination information (a function of executing the processing of step S1608 and step S1613 in the display CPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, it is possible to independently and individually control the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image when the predetermined individual image is subjected to change display in a predetermined mode. Thereby, in the case of diversifying the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image, it becomes possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently and individually, and the diversification is performed. It will be easier.

  Feature E2. A second predetermined mode for determining the second display content of the predetermined individual image of each update timing when the second determination means causes the predetermined individual image to perform change display according to the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to the feature E1, characterized in that the information is determined using the second predetermined mode determining information (flashing display table 146) set in time series.

  According to the feature E2, each predetermined mode is provided by separately providing the first predetermined mode determining information for determining the first display content and the second predetermined mode determining information for determining the second display content. While it is possible to execute display control in accordance with the application information, it becomes possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently and individually.

Feature E3. The information for determining the first predetermined mode is
A first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first predetermined reference information is set such that the reference target by the first determining means is sequentially updated each time the first display content of the predetermined individual image is updated When,
The first predetermined mode information is set to correspond to each of the first predetermined reference information, and the first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content at each update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is set. Aspect information group (size information and tip position information),
Equipped with
The information for determining the second predetermined mode is
A second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second predetermined reference information items are sequentially set such that the reference object by the second determination means is sequentially updated each time the second display content of the predetermined individual image is updated When,
The second predetermined mode information is set so that the second predetermined mode information for determining the second display contents at each update timing of the second display contents of the predetermined individual image is made to correspond to each of the second predetermined reference information Aspect information group (information of image data),
The gaming machine according to feature E2, comprising:

  According to the feature E3, a dedicated first predetermined reference information group is set in the first predetermined mode determination information and a dedicated second predetermined reference information group is set in the second predetermined mode determination information. There is. Thereby, it becomes easy to control independently the update period of the 1st display content, and the update period of the 2nd display content independently.

  Feature E4. A unit (function to execute the processing of step S1610 and step S1612 in the display CPU 72) is provided for changing the update period of one of the first display content and the second display content independently of the update period of the other. A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3 characterized in that.

  According to the feature E4, the update period of one of the first display content and the second display content is changed independently of the update period of the other, so that the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image It becomes possible to realize diversification suitably.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is sent to the display means. Displaying an image on the display unit based on the output;
The predetermined individual image is displayed using first predetermined individual image data (band display image data 142) and second predetermined individual image data (lighting image data 143, light-out image data 144).
The first display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
The second display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
In order to set the second predetermined individual image data in association with the first predetermined individual image data when setting the second predetermined individual image data in the storage means for setting in the first predetermined mode determination information, The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4 characterized in that the information (tip position information) is set.

  According to the feature E5, even in the configuration in which the first display content and the second display content can be controlled independently and individually, the second predetermined individual image data in the aspect associated with the first predetermined individual image data It becomes possible to easily set the setting storage means.

Feature E6. One of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

  According to the feature E6, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image can be independently controlled.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B8, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D9, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G6 with respect to any one of the features E1 to E6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
Setting storage means (VRAM 204) in which the image data is set;
Deriving means (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information that determines the setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means;
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the storage means for setting according to the parameter information derived by the derivation means, and an image signal according to the drawing data is output to the display means Display control means (VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit based on
In a gaming machine provided with
The display control means may include predetermined type image data (image data 241 on the back surface, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, image data 244 for the effect character). After the predetermined type image is displayed over the front period based on setting in the setting storage unit, the display of the predetermined type image based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage unit is performed on the back side. It has a predetermined type control means (function to execute setting processing for another storage display in the VDP 205) which is not performed over a period,
The parameter information derived by the deriving means for applying to the predetermined type image data in the front side period is stored in a predetermined storage area of a predetermined storage means (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is the back side period Even, the gaming machine characterized by being held as an area for storing parameter information of the predetermined type image data.

  According to the feature F1, even if the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is interrupted, the predetermined storage area in which the parameter information for applying to the predetermined type image data is stored is the corresponding storage area. By holding as a region for storing parameter information of predetermined type image data, a process for securing the predetermined storage area is newly provided when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is resumed. There is no need to do it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restarting the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to the feature F1, wherein the deriving unit updates parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data even in the back side period.

  According to the feature F2, the parameter information for applying to the predetermined type image data is updated even in the rear period, so that the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is completed after the rear period ends. When being resumed, the display type immediately before the start of the rear period is changed from the state in which the change of the content of the predetermined type image is continued for the rear period according to the display pattern determined in time series. It is possible to resume the display of the predetermined type image using the image data.

  Feature F3. The predetermined type control means is pre-created data (first separately stored image data 245, second separately stored image data 247) created based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means in the front period. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the drawing data in the back side period is created by using.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to display a predetermined type of image even in the rear period.

  Feature F4. The predetermined type control means sets the previously created data and additional image data (image data for additional individual image 246, effect image data 248) in the setting storage means in the rear period. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein drawing data is created.

  According to the feature F4, since the additional image data is added as the image data to be used in the rear side period, it is possible to make the display content flashy. Further, in the rear period, since the pre-created data is used as the image data for displaying the predetermined type image, not the predetermined type image data, the additional image data is added as the image data to be used It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F5. The rear period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the front period,
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before the predetermined start trigger can occur in the front period.

  According to the feature F5, since the pre-created data is created before the predetermined start trigger can occur, the predetermined start trigger is generated as compared to the configuration in which the pre-created data is generated at the timing when the predetermined start trigger occurs. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load of the timing which occurred.

  Feature F6. The predetermined type control means is continued if the predetermined start trigger has not occurred by the branch timing of the one for which the previously created data is created before the predetermined start trigger can occur in the front period. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the pre-created data is newly created in the front period.

  According to the feature F6, since the pre-created data is newly created as needed, it is possible to use the pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing of actually using the pre-created data Become.

  Feature F7. Any one of the features F3 to F6, wherein the predetermined type control means generates a plurality of types of the preliminary creation data so that the contents of the image displayed by the preliminary creation data differ in the front period. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature F7, by creating a plurality of types of pre-created data, it is possible to diversify a situation in which display of an image is executed using the pre-created data.

Feature F8. At least a first preliminary creation data (a second separate storage image data 247) and a second preliminary creation data (a first separate storage image data 245) are created as the preliminary creation data,
As the rear side period, there is a first rear side period and a second rear side period that may occur later than the first rear side period,
The predetermined type control means is
First pre-creating means (function of executing the processing of step S3910 to step S3912 in VDP 205) of creating the drawing data using the first pre-created data in the first back period;
Second pre-creating means (function of executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3909 in the VDP 205) of creating the drawing data by using the second pre-created data in the second rear period;
The gaming machine according to feature F7, comprising:

  According to the feature F8, it is possible to use pre-created data suitable for each rear period.

Feature F9. The first rear period occurs when a predetermined start trigger occurs in the front period,
The first previously created data and the second previously created data are created before the predetermined start trigger can occur in the front period,
In the feature F8, the second preliminary creation means creates the second preliminary creation data anew in the continued front side period when the predetermined start trigger does not occur in the front side period. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature F9, when the first rear side period does not occur, the second preliminary generation data is newly generated before the second rear side period occurs, so the second preliminary generation data is actually generated. It is possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing to use.

Feature F10. The display control means
Arrangement means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information, as the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604 in VDP 205);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2606 in the VDP 205);
Setting means for drawing that projects the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creates the drawing data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (the processing of steps S2607 to S2612 in VDP 205 Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F9, comprising:

  According to the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above in the configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6 One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature A group-the above-mentioned feature F group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. And a first control unit (main MPU 52) and a second control unit (sound light MPU 62, display CPU 72, VDP 76).
The first control means is
An application determining unit (a function for executing special figure electric power control processing in the main side MPU 52) that determines whether to apply a bonus to the player or not;
Information transmitting means (function to execute special figure special power control processing in the main side MPU 52) for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of the assignment determination;
Equipped with
The second control means is
Content determination means (function to execute the processing of step S404 and step S406 to step S408 in the sound-light side MPU 62) for determining the effect contents of the unit effect (effect for game circulation) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information;
Effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for controlling the effect executing means (the symbol display device 41) such that the unit effect corresponding to the effect contents determined by the content determining means is executed;
Equipped with
As effect contents that can be determined by the content determination means based on the predetermined correspondence information of the same type, the first effect content whose duration of effect corresponds to the first duration, and the duration of effect is equivalent to the second duration A game machine comprising at least a second effect content to be played.

  According to the feature G1, it is possible to diversify the effect contents by selecting the effect contents having different durations of the effect from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, and processing for determining the effect contents It is possible to increase the freedom of configuration.

  Feature G2. In the feature G1, the effect execution control means ends the unit effect when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has elapsed regardless of which of the effect contents is determined by the content determination means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G2, the unit presentation ends when the continuation period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information elapses even if any of the effect contents are determined, so the continuation period of the appearance differs from the predetermined correspondence information of the same type Even if the content of the effect can be selected, it is possible to set the duration of the unit effect to the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G3. The first control means is provided with a duration determination means (function to execute the special figure electric power control process in the main side MPU 52) for determining the duration of the unit effect.
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that enables the second control means to specify the continuation period determined by the continuation period determination means.

  According to the feature G3, even if the second control means performs execution control of the unit effect by the duration of the unit effect being determined in the first control means, the second control means to the first control means It becomes possible to grasp the duration of the unit effect in the first control means without requiring the transmission of the information. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature G2 described above, the duration of the unit effect can be selected even if the effect content having different durations of the effect can be selected from predetermined correspondence information of the same type. It is possible to set the duration determined by one control means.

  Feature G4. The effect content determined by the content determining means is characterized in that the duration corresponding to the effect content is the effect content for which the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the determination of the effect content is equal to or less than the duration The gaming machine according to feature G2 or G3.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the unit effect is ended and the unit effect is ended during the execution of the effect contents determined by the content determining means.

Feature G5. The effect execution control means causes the effect execution means to perform an effect of holding the pattern in a predetermined area and displaying the image in a standby state after the variation display of the pattern is performed as the unit effect.
A unit for extending the execution period of the standby display according to the duration of the effect content determined by the content determining means if the duration of the effect content is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information (step S504 in the sound light side MPU 62 A game machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing a process.

  According to the feature G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the duration of the effect content determined by the content determining means and the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is compensated. As a result, it is not necessary to largely correct the effect contents of the unit effect in order to compensate for the difference, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for compensating for the difference.

Feature G6. The content determination means
A unit that determines the effect contents of the first effect range among the unit effects by executing the first lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S404 in the sound / light MPU 62);
A unit that determines the effect content of the second effect range among the unit effects by executing the second lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S406 in the sound / light MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G5, comprising:

  According to the feature G6, by performing the first lottery process and the second lottery process and determining the effect content of the unit effect, it becomes possible to irregularly determine the effect content of the unit effect. In this case, since the effect contents having different durations of effects can be selected from the predetermined types of corresponding information having the configuration of the feature G1, the degree of freedom in design of the first lottery process and the second lottery process is enhanced. Be

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B8, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D9, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G6 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature G group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing effects such as display effects is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (for measurement display in the display CPU 72) which performs display control of the display means so that measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of measurement objects (the number of obtained game balls) is displayed on the display unit A function of executing the arithmetic processing of (1), a function of executing the arithmetic processing for increase display in the display CPU 72),
Equipped with
The display control means changes the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when updating the measurement result information (step S2003, step S2007, step S2010, and step S2012 in the display CPU 72) And a function of executing the processing of step S2102 to the processing of step S2104 in the display CPU 72).

  According to the feature H1, by displaying measurement result information corresponding to the number of measurement targets on the display unit, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of measurement targets. In this case, when the measurement result information is updated, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information is changed. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes.

Feature H2. The display control means causes the display of the measurement result information to be started when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs.
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within the range of one measurement cycle.

  According to the feature H2, since the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement cycle, the aspect in which the measurement result information changes even within the range of one measurement cycle is diversified It becomes possible.

Feature H3. The display control means causes the display of the measurement result information to be started when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs.
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement cycle and another measurement cycle.

  According to the feature H3, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes in each measurement cycle.

  Feature H4. The gaming machine according to the feature H3, wherein the change value changing means sets a value corresponding to a result of dividing a value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value as the change value.

  According to the feature H4, it is possible to make the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information irregular in accordance with the value to be finally displayed as the measurement result information.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing means changes the change value according to a value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information.

  According to the feature H5, the change value is changed in accordance with the value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information, whereby the change value of the value of the measurement result information is associated with the value to be reflected. It is possible to change it.

  Feature H6. The change value changing means sets the value of the change value to a larger value as the value to be reflected on the value displayed in the measurement result information is larger, according to any one of the features H1 to H5. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature H6, as the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is larger, the value of the change value is larger, and thus the reflection of the value to be reflected on the measurement result information is completed. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes while shortening the time required until then.

Feature H7. The display control means
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to an increase in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is divided into a plurality of update timings and displayed in the measurement result information First reflecting means (function of executing processing of step S2005 to step S2013 in the display CPU 72) to be reflected on the value being stored,
If the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to a decrease in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing Second reflecting means (function of executing the processing of step S2003 and step S2004 in the display CPU 72) to be reflected on the value
Equipped with
The change value changing means divides the value to be reflected by the first reflection means into a plurality of update timings and reflects the value displayed in the measurement result information, in each of the update timings. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized in that the change value can be changed.

  According to the feature H7, it is possible to emphasize that the value of the measurement object is increased by dividing and reflecting the value to be reflected to the plural update timings when the value of the measurement object is increased. Thus, when the value of the measurement object decreases, the value to be reflected is reflected at one update timing, so that the decrease of the value of the measurement object can be made inconspicuous. In this case, since the change value at each update timing may be changed when the value of the measurement target increases, the measurement result information changes in a situation emphasizing that the value of the measurement target is increasing. It is possible to diversify some aspects.

  Feature H8. The measurement object is a difference between an increase in the number of game media usable by the player and a decrease in the number of game media usable by the player. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H8, when the difference between the increase and decrease in the number of game media usable by the player is displayed as the measurement result information, the aspect in which the measurement result information changes is diversified. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B8, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D9, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G6 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H8. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned characteristic H group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Effect execution means (symbol display device 41) for executing an effect;
Effect control means (sound light side MPU 62, display CPU 201, VDP 205) for controlling the effect execution means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The effect control means is a time response control means (sound light side to cause the effect executing means to start the special effect (effect of the special period) when the predetermined start corresponding time is reached and the start condition is satisfied. A game machine having a function of executing the processing of step S3010 and step S3011 in the MPU 62.

  According to the feature I1, by the special effect being started when the predetermined start corresponding time comes, it is possible to perform the effect triggered by the predetermined time. Further, for example, the same effect can be simultaneously started in a plurality of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall. In addition, it is not preferable to start the special effect from the viewpoint of facilitating the understanding of the processing load and the game content by the special effect being started when the start corresponding time is reached and the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent the special rendition from being started in the situation.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the time correspondence control means starts the special effect after a preparation period has elapsed, when the start correspondence time has come.

  According to the feature I2, when the start corresponding time is reached, the special effect is started after the preparation period has elapsed, so that it is possible to set the start time of the special effect as the predetermined time. In addition, it becomes possible to distribute and execute the processing required to execute the special presentation in the preparation period, and it becomes possible to disperse the processing load.

Feature I3. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect executing means to execute an optional response effect (effect for game circulation) when an arbitrary trigger occurs at an arbitrary timing. ~ Function to execute the process of step S3213),
The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period equal to or longer than a longest execution period of the execution periods of the optional corresponding presentation.

  According to the feature I3, since the preparation period is set as the period longer than the longest execution period of the optional corresponding effect, even if the start corresponding time is reached in the situation where the optional corresponding effect is being executed, the special effect starts Before it becomes the timing to make it run, the arbitrary corresponding production in the middle of the execution ends. As a result, it becomes possible to limit the execution situation of the arbitrary corresponding presentation when the special presentation is started to a predetermined situation, and the occurrence of an event that the processing load at the timing when the special presentation is started becomes extremely high. It is possible to block.

Feature I4. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect executing means to execute an optional response effect (effect for game circulation) when an arbitrary trigger occurs at an arbitrary timing. ~ Function to execute the process of step S3213),
The optional response control means restricts the content of the optional response effect to a predetermined effect content when starting the optional response effect until the start condition is satisfied after the start response time is reached. The gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized in that

  According to the feature I4, it is possible to limit the effect contents of the optional corresponding effect when the special effect is started to the predetermined effect content. As a result, it is possible to start arbitrary response effects before starting special effects after reaching the start corresponding time, and at the same time, the processing load at the timing when special effects are started becomes extremely high. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of

  Feature I5. The production control means (presence control means (sound light) causes the effect executing means to execute a preparation-ready effect (effect of the preparation period) until the start corresponding time is reached and the start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4, characterized in that the side MPU 62 is equipped with a function to execute the processing of step S2806, step S2807, step S3006 and step S3007.

  According to the feature I5, by performing the preparation corresponding rendering, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special rendering is to be executed from now.

  Feature I6. When the restriction condition is satisfied when the start correspondence time comes, the preparation correspondence control unit does not start the preparation correspondence effect until the restriction condition is canceled. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I6, when the restriction condition is satisfied, the preparation corresponding presentation is not started even if the start corresponding time is reached, and the preparation corresponding presentation is started in the unfavorable condition from the viewpoint of the processing load etc. It becomes possible not to go wrong.

  Feature I7. The game machine according to Feature I6, wherein the preparation handling control means causes notification (display of remaining time notification image G63) corresponding thereto to be executed when the restriction condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature I7, it is possible to make the player recognize that the preparation corresponding rendering and the special rendering are to be executed from now, even in the situation where the limiting condition is established.

Feature I8. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect executing means to execute an optional response effect (effect for game circulation) when an arbitrary trigger occurs at an arbitrary timing. ~ Function to execute the process of step S3213),
When the start corresponding time is reached in the situation where the optional corresponding effect is being executed, the preparation corresponding control means assumes that the restriction condition is satisfied, and the ready corresponding effect is continued until the optional corresponding effect is ended. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or I7, characterized in that it is not caused to start.

  According to the feature I8, it is possible to prevent the preparation corresponding presentation from being started during execution of the arbitrary corresponding presentation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the processing load at the timing when the preparation response effect starts is extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect execution means is a display means having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a),
When the preparation-ready effect and another effect (effect for game circulation) are simultaneously executed, the preparation-ready effect is executed in a partial area of the display unit, and another area of the display unit (section display The game machine according to any one of the features I5 to I8, wherein the other effect is executed in the area G66).

  According to the feature I9, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize each of the preparation corresponding presentation and the other presentation.

  Feature I10. The preparation correspondence control means causes the effect execution means to notify remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special effect is started, as the preparation corresponding effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I9.

  According to the feature I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special effect is approaching by checking the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation handling control means
Even if the timing when the preparation corresponding presentation is started is any timing, the display is started from the information of the predetermined initial value as the remaining time information, and the update of the remaining time information until the information of the predetermined end value (A function of executing the process of step S3404 in the display CPU 201);
A unit (function of executing the processing of step S3402 and step S3403 in the display CPU 201) for changing one update value of the remaining time information according to the timing when the preparation corresponding presentation is started;
The gaming machine according to feature I10, comprising:

  According to the feature I11, it is possible to diversify the update mode of the remaining time information in relation to the timing at which the preparation corresponding presentation is started.

  Feature I12. When the start corresponding time or a predetermined time before the start condition is satisfied, it is determined in the effect executing means (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) different from the effect executing means. A game machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, characterized by comprising means for starting an effect (a function of executing the process of step S2801 in the sound light side MPU 62).

  According to the feature I12, it is possible to reliably start a predetermined effect at the start corresponding time. As a result, for example, regardless of the effect execution status of the effect execution means of the plurality of game machines installed in the game hall, it becomes possible to start predetermined effects simultaneously in the plurality of game machines.

  Note that for any one of the features I1 to I12, features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6 One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature I group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a bonus is provided to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is general that an effect for causing a player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  About a pachinko machine Specifically, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, and the variation display of the pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed It is known that, when a winning result is obtained, the combination of a specific pattern etc. is displayed on the display surface as a final stop, and a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is made. And when it shifts to the special game state, opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area, for example, is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, it is necessary to provide novel game contents in game machines such as those described above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
It is possible to create drawing data based on setting the image data in setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and output an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the basis of the display unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
The display control means
Specific individual images (first pseudo moving image character G42, second pseudo moving image character G43, pseudo using the first still image data (first character image data 171) stored in advance in the display storage means A function to execute the processing of step S2204 to step S2207 in the display CPU 72 to display the first frame image (first character image G41, first pseudo moving image G52) including the movie character G51) )When,
Second frame image (second character image G 48, second pseudo image) including the specific individual image using the second still image data (second character image data 173) stored in advance in the display storage unit Second frame control means (a function of executing the processing of step S2217 to step S2220 in the display CPU 72) for displaying the moving image G53);
Intermediate image data stored in advance in the display storage means at the update timing of the image after the first frame image is displayed and at the update timing of the image before the second frame image is displayed Midway control means (display CPU 72 in step S2211 to step S2214) for displaying an intermediate image (effect image G45, pseudo-moving image effect image G54) not including the specific individual image using the image data 172) Function),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the specific individual image is displayed between the update timing when the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing when the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. An intermediate image not included is displayed. As a result, even in a situation where image data for causing the player to recognize that a moving image display of a specific individual image is performed is not sufficient, a specific individual image can be obtained by interposing an intermediate image. It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display for the is being performed.

  Feature J2. The first frame control means is characterized by displaying the first frame image with different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the first still image data to the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature J1.

  According to the feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

  Feature J3. The second frame control means is characterized by displaying the second frame image with different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the second still image data to the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2.

  According to the feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J4. The intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image in the specific effect period, and the second frame image is displayed next to the intermediate image,
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific effect period,
The game machine according to any one of the features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in a second period different from the specific effect period and the first period.

  According to the feature J4, an effect of displaying a specific individual image in a specific effect period is performed using the first still image data used in the first period and the second still image data used in the second period Ru. This makes it possible to share still image data in a plurality of situations, and to reduce the storage capacity required for the display storage means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature J1, even if the first still image data and the second still image data are used as such, a moving image of a specific individual image in a specific effect period It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the display is being performed.

Feature J5. With respect to a predetermined portion (predetermined portion G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image, the predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image has a predetermined operation path The first still image data and the second still image data are set to be displayed at a position on the front side of the
The intermediate image data is set such that the intermediate image (individual image G 54 a) displayed in the intermediate image is displaced in accordance with the predetermined operation path, according to any one of the features J 1 to J 4. Of gaming machines.

  According to the feature J5, the intermediate image is displayed such that the individual image is displaced on the way according to the operation path of the predetermined part in the specific individual image by the first still image data and the second still image data. Even when the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image by the image data and the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image by the second still image data are apart, the predetermined part is displaced according to the predetermined operation path It is possible to give the player the impression of being

  Feature J6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are photographed images, and the intermediate image is a non-photographed image.

  According to the feature J6, it is possible to give the player the impression that the moving image display for a specific individual image is performed by using the non-actual shot image even in a situation where there are few types of actual shot images. Become.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the feature B1 to B8, the feature C1 to C8, the feature D1 to D9, the feature E1 to E6, the feature F1 to F10, the feature G1 to G6 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J6. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means is
First moving image data (a first moving image data group 261 of A-angle) capable of displaying a series of specific moving images by using image data created by execution of decoding processing;
Second moving image data (A-angle that enables to display a moving image in the middle of the specified moving image, which is started from the middle of the specified moving image, by using the image data created by performing the decoding process Second video data group 262) of
A game machine characterized by storing in advance.

  According to the feature K1, by providing not only the first moving image data but the second moving image data, the first moving image data and the second moving image to be used according to the timing when the display start trigger occurs It is possible to select any of the data. Thus, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the beginning of the specific moving image by switching the moving image data to be used, and the display of the specific moving image can be started from the middle of the specific moving image.

Feature K2. The first moving image data includes a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) with different display periods corresponding to the specific moving image.
The second moving image data includes a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) with different display periods corresponding to the specified intermediate moving image.
Each of the second unit moving image data is a moving image started from an intermediate timing of the moving image displayed by using the corresponding first unit moving image data in the plurality of first unit moving image data. The gaming machine according to the feature K1, which is set as data to be displayed.

  According to the feature K2, it is possible to set many timings enabling the specific moving image to be started halfway, and it becomes easy to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the generation start timing of the display start timing.

  Feature K3. In the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data of corresponding orders, the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data The shift amount of the update timing of the image between the start timing of the moving image displayed by using it is the same in each combination of the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order. Or the gaming machine according to the feature K2 characterized in that it is substantially identical.

  According to the feature K3, it is easy to design the timing at which the display of the moving image by the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the display of the moving image by the second unit moving image data can be started. Be

  Feature K4. The first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data such that the number of image data created by the execution of the decoding process becomes the minimum number that can be set as moving image data. The game machine according to feature K2 or K3.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to set many timings at which it is possible to switch to the display of a moving image by the first moving image data and many timings at which it is possible to switch to the display of the moving image by the second moving image data. In addition, it is possible to reduce the data amount of moving image data read out at one time.

  Feature K5. The display control means causes the display of the specific moving image using the first moving image data to start when a predetermined operation is performed by the player at a timing before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image. When the predetermined operation is performed at a timing later than the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, target switching means (step in display CPU 201 for starting display of the specific moving image using the second moving image data) A game machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4, comprising the function of executing the processing of S4105 to step S4117.

  According to the feature K5, even if the predetermined operation by the player occurs at any timing, it becomes possible to start the display of the specific moving image from the situation corresponding to the generation timing of the predetermined operation.

  Feature K6. The target switching unit is configured to perform the predetermined operation at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and at a timing before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image. Also, when the predetermined operation is performed after the timing before the period required to start using the second moving image data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start, the second moving image data The gaming machine according to the feature K5, wherein display of the moving image during specification is not started during use.

  According to the feature K6, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation within the range in which the use of the second moving image data can be smoothly started.

Feature K7. The display control means is an object switching means (in the display CPU 201 for switching to a state in which another moving image is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by the player in a state in which any moving image of a plurality of types of moving images is displayed. Function to execute the processing of step S4105 to step S4117),
The combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a first moving image of the plurality of types of moving images,
The display storage means is
Third moving image data (a first moving image data group 264 of B-angle) which makes it possible to display a series of predetermined moving images by using the image data created by the execution of the decoding process;
Fourth moving image data (B-angle (B-angle that enables to display a predetermined moving image started from the middle of the predetermined moving image by using the image data generated by the execution of the decoding process) Second video data group 265) of
Is stored in advance,
A combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a second moving image of the plurality of types of moving images, of the features K1 to K6. The gaming machine according to any one.

  According to the feature K7, it is possible to set many timings at which switching of a moving image to be displayed can be performed between the first moving image and the second moving image.

Feature K8. The first moving image data and the third moving image data have the same timing at which the start image can be displayed in a predetermined effect period,
The game machine according to Feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data coincide in timing when the start image can be displayed in the predetermined effect period.

  According to the feature K8, when one of the first moving image and the second moving image is switched to the other, it is possible to start the display of the moving image of the switching destination from the display content corresponding to the display content of the switching source.

  Feature K9. The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images having different angles at which special individual images are displayed.

  According to the feature K9, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above in the configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images having different angles at which the special individual image is displayed.

Feature K10. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
Equipped with
The display storage means uses predetermined image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) that can display a series of special moving images by using image data created by execution of the decoding process. In advance),
The predetermined moving image data includes a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) with different display periods corresponding to the special moving image.
A game machine characterized in that the special unit moving image data is data in which the number of image data created by execution of the decoding process becomes the minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

  According to the feature K10, it is possible to set many timings at which it is possible to switch to display of a moving image by predetermined moving image data. In addition, it is possible to reduce the data amount of moving image data read out at one time.

  In addition, the feature A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6 with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K10. One or more of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature J group and the above-mentioned feature K group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as a type of gaming machine. As these gaming machines, one having a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In the gaming machine, a memory in which data for an image is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the data for the image read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as that illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine comprising: each gaming component arranged in an area, and providing a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of the gaming components.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  10: Pachinko machine, 41: symbol display device, 41a: liquid crystal display unit, 44: display light emitting unit, 45: speaker unit, 52: main side MPU, 62: sound light side MPU, 72: display CPU, 74: memory module , 76: VDP, 82a: first frame area, 82b: second frame area, 122: character stopping table, 123: character moving table, 124: background table, 125: interlocking flag, 132: decoded image data , 142: band display image data, 143: lighting image data, 144: turn-off image data, 145: band display table, 146: blinking display table, 171: first character image data, 172: effect image Data 173: second character image data 201: display CPU 202: work RAM 203 Memory module, 204 ... VRAM, 205 ... VDP, 211 ... VRAM, 211 a ... Area for texture, 211 b ... Area for moving image data, 241 ... Backmost image data, 242 ... Image data for first background individual image, 243 ... Image data for the second background individual image, 244: image data for the effect character, 245: first separately stored image data, 246: image data for the added individual image, 247: second separately stored image data, 248: effect Image data 261 to 269: moving image data group 271a to 273c: moving image data 282: special moving image data 284: still image data G4: character for loop display G5: background for loop display G11: group display Character, G22 ... effective period image, G24 ... band image, G25 ... blinking image, G31 ... individual Display image, G41: first character image, G42: first pseudo animation character, G43: second pseudo animation character, G45: effect image, G48: second character image, G51: pseudo animation character, G51 a ... predetermined part, G 52 ... first pseudo moving picture image, G 53 ... second pseudo moving picture image, G 54 ... pseudo moving picture effect image, G 54 a ... individual image, G 63 ... remaining time notification image, G 66 ... section display area, T 10 ... Execution target table for acceleration period, T11 ... execution target table for the first high speed period, T12 ... execution target table for the first low speed period.

Claims (2)

Display means having a display unit;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine provided with
First mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in time series, and first mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image is set in time series An information storage unit that stores in advance the second mode determination information;
When the first type image and the second type image are simultaneously displayed on the display unit, the display control means determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determining information, and A simultaneous display control unit configured to determine a display mode of the second type image according to the information for determining the second mode ;
The simultaneous display control means
When the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, start information is set in the start information storage means, and the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information Means for deleting the start information from the start information storage means when completing the process;
A unit that causes the display of the second type image according to the second mode determination information when the start information is set in the start information storage unit;
Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is performed using a gaming medium.

Images